Home

4 - Ricoh

1. rrri iii 69 5 Using a Print Server Preparing Print Server ses 73 6 Special Operations under Windows Printing Files Directly from WindowSs rrrririir iii 75 SEUD sapato ae 15 PANG COMMAND 76 7 Mac OS X Configuration Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver ss 79 Specifying the Printer en Stoa Sia Li dva sf ee n 80 SING USB e A A 80 ESET POR aaa a O IS 81 Setting UP OpHons acti E ae 84 setting Up for Printing us 2 een 85 Making paper settings from an application 85 Setting up for printing from an application 85 Canceling a Print Job from the Computer serre eni 86 Using Posiscripts cenone ee ete do 87 Using Smart Organizing MONItOr ssi 89 Installing Smart Organizing Monitor 89 Displaying the Smart Organizing Monitor Dialog BOX 89 Displaying the Printer Status 90 Displaying the Printer Information 90 Printer Configuration vaio aaa na 92 8 Appendix Software and Utilities Included on the CD ROM ss si 97 Printer Drivers for this Printer 97 Smart Organizing MONITO nee avd he Va Tp ao 98 Cautions to Take When Using in a Network ssa 99 VEE eating ST 99 Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6 0 6 5 or 7 O nnnnsuununennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 100 When Using Windows Terminal Service Citrix Presentation Server Citrix
2. Available ports Standard TCP IP Reference For details about how to use this printer as the Windows printing port see p 8 Installing the Printer Driver in a Network Environment Preparing for Printing Using as a network printer This printer can be used as the Windows network printer Windows 2000 XP Vista Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 Print Server O amp D INV Windows 2000 indows Windows Vista Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 BXG501 P Reference For details about how to use this printer as a Windows network printer see p 15 Installing the Printer Driver to Use As a Windows Network Printer Local Connection Local connections can be established via USB connections P Reference For details about how to install the printer driver see p 16 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB Installing Drivers and Software Installing Drivers and Software You can install the necessary drivers and software for this printer from the supplied CD ROM The supplied drivers and software are supported by the following operating systems PCL 6 printer driver Windows 2000 XP Vista and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 lt PostScript 3 printer driver Windows 2000 XP Vista and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 Mac OS X 10 2 8 10 3 10 4 10 5 lt Smart Organizing Monitor Windows 2000 XP Vista and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 Mac OS X 10 2 8 10 3 10 4 10 5 9 Note O
3. Message Explanation Recommended Action An error has occurred with The printer detected the net Turn off the power and then the network device work device error turn it on again If the error occurs again con tact your sales or service repre sentative An error has occurred with The printer detected the USB Turn off the power and then the USB device device error turn it on again If the error occurs again contact your sales or service representa tive Cover Open The front cover or rear cover Open and then close the front Close the indicated cover Open cover or rear cover Front or Rear Cover Feed Roller has reached to The feed roller is no longer Contact your sales or service replacing period usable and must be replaced representative Functional problem within A fatal hardware error has Turn off the power and then the printer occurred and the printer turn it on again Turn power switch off then cannot function If the error occurs again contact on your sales or service representa If the error appears again tive please call service SCXXX Fusing Unit has reached to The fusing unit is no longer Contact your sales or service replacing period usable and must be replaced representative Independent supplier toner A non supported print car Remove and replace it with a has been set tridge is installed print cartridge specified by an au
4. O Do not forcefully remove misfed paper it will tear Torn pieces remaining inside the printer will cause further misfeeds and possibly damage the printer O Paper jams can cause pages to be lost Check your print job for missing pages and reprint any pages that did not print out Removing Jammed Paper from the Inner Tray 1 Tray 2 Use the following procedure to remove paper that has become jammed inside the printer or in the paper feed area A CAUTION The inside of this machine becomes very hot Do not touch parts labelled A indicating a hot surface 1 Pull tray 1 halfway out and check for jammed paper If there is jammed paper remove it carefully BXG073 2 Carefully slide tray 1 back in until it stops 85 86 Removing Misfed Paper E If paper is loaded in the bypass tray remove the paper 4 Close the bypass tray B Push the side button to open the front cover and then carefully lower it BXG057 G Carefully pull out the print cartridge horizontally holding its center e Do not shake the removed print cartridge Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak e Place the print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace 7 Lifting the guide plate remove the jammed paper carefully BXG067 When Paper is Jammed 8 Slide the print cartridge in horizontally When the cartridge can go no fur ther raise it slightly and push it
5. Fixed USB Port e Off Allocates automatically a USB serial number that is different from the USB serial numbers of other printers e On Allocates automatically a USB serial number that is the same as the USB se rial number of other printers Using Smart Organizing Monitor under the Macintosh Environment TCP IP IP Address This device s network IP address Enter it in the following format XXX XXX XXX XXX replace x with the appropriate numbers for example 123 123 123 123 Subnet Mask Specify the part of the IP address used as the subnet mask Enter it in the fol lowing format xxx xxx xxx xxx replace x with the appropriate numbers for example 123 123 123 123 Default Gateway Address Enter the default gateway address The default gateway address is the IP ad dress of the host or router used as the gateway when communicating print ing or exchanging information with a computer on another network DHCP Select On to automatically configure the network settings using the DHCP server Select Off to configure the network settings manually If DHCP is active all TCP IP settings are obtained automatically from the DHCP server DNS Method The default setting is Auto When Auto is selected the primary DNS server IP address and the DNS domain name obtained from the DHCP server are displayed If you select Manual you can manually specify the primary DNS server IP address and the DNS domain
6. Using Smart Organizing Monitor under the Macintosh Environment Low Humidity Mode If the printer is used in a room where humidity level is low black lines of a few millimeters thick may appear on printouts with 75 mm spaces in be tween Selecting On for this setting may prevent these lines from appearing wait for about one day until this setting becomes effective Note that when this setting is enabled the printer automatically performs self maintenance in every 10 minutes Energy Saver Mode 1 When this function is enabled less electricity is used Energy Saver Mode 2 When this function is enabled less electricity is used than under Energy Saver 1 9 Note Even if Energy Saver Mode 2 is enabled the printer will not enter Energy Saver Mode 2 for two hours if Low Humidity Mode is enabled Energy Saver Mode 2 Timer When Energy Saver Mode 2 is enabled you can specify a timeout period Print Error Page Prints an error report if an error occurs during print data processing Device Comment Enter a note about the printer using up to 32 alphanumeric characters Restore Factory Defaults Resets all settings to their default values Access Code Select whether or not to use the access code If you select Use the tabs you can see set may vary depending on the access code settings If you select Do not Use the access code setting screen does not appear before the Printer Configuration setting Do not Use i
7. Vertical After printing the test sheet you can adjust the vertical print position in the range of from 15 to 15 in increments of 0 1 mm Registration Tray 2 Adjust the position of Tray2 if it is installed Print Test Sheet Click this button to check the printing position using a test print Horizontal After printing the test sheet you can adjust the horizontal print position in the range of from 15 to 15 in increments of 0 1 mm Vertical After printing the test sheet you can adjust the vertical print position in the range of from 15 to 15 in increments of 0 1 mm Registration Bypass Tray Adjust the position of the print image on sheets fed from the bypass tray Print Test Sheet Click this button to check the printing position using a test print Horizontal After printing the test sheet you can adjust the horizontal print position in the range of from 15 to 15 in increments of 0 1 mm Vertical After printing the test sheet you can adjust the vertical print position in the range of from 15 to 15 in increments of 0 1 mm Using Smart Organizing Monitor under the Macintosh Environment Registration Duplex Tray When the duplex tray is installed and duplex print is enabled you can adjust the position of the back side print if necessary Print Test Sheet Click this button to check the printing position using a test print e Horizontal After printing the test sheet you can adjust the hor
8. Other Printing Problems Status Possible Causes Descriptions and Solutions Images are printed diagonally to the pages m ASH103S Adjust the front end paper guide and both side paper guides to match the paper size See p 41 Loading Paper Horizontal lines appear on the printed paper e Impact can cause lines to appear on printed paper and other malfunctions Protect the printer from impact at all times especially while it is printing e If lines appear on prints turn the printer off wait a few moments and then turn it back on again Then perform the print job again Paper is not fed from the select ed tray When you are using the Windows operating system the y 8 P 8 Sy printer driver settings override those set using the control panel Set the desired input tray using the printer driver See the printer driver Help A printed image is different from the image on the compu ter s display When you use some functions such as enlargement and reduction the layout of the image might be different from that displayed in the computer display It takes too much time to resume printing e The data is so large or complex that it takes time to proc ess it If the Ready indicator is blinking the data is being processed Just wait until it resumes e The printer was in the Energy Saver mode To resume from the Energy Saver mode the printer has to warm up and this takes tim
9. vicio Anv nd en sk rmad Ethernet kabel Ej sk rmade kablar skapar elektromagnetisk st rning som kan orsaka fel Handbok f r maskinvara Papper och andra media gt Rekommenderat papper gt Papperstyper och andra medier gt Papperstyper Handbok f r maskinvara Papper och andra media gt Fylla p papper gt Fylla p papper i sidoinmatningsfacket gt Fylla p kuvert Undvik att anv nda sj lvh ftande kuvert De kan orsaka fel i skrivaren Handbok f r maskinvara Fels kning gt Fel amp statusmeddelanden i Smart Organizing Monitor Fyll p papper av angivet format i kassetten och ndra sedan pappersformatinst llningen med hj lp av Smart Organizing Monitor Handbok f r programvara Ovrig utskriftshantering gt Sortera Ka Obs Sorteringen avbryts om Automatisk forts ttning tillimpas p den f rsta upps ttningen Sorteringen avbryts om sidmatning till mpas p den f rsta upps ttningen Referens Mer information om utskriftsmetoder finns i skrivardrivrutinens hj lp 22 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 23 of 32 o Pozn mky pro uzivatele Tyto pozn mky poskytuj dopl kov informace o pou v n tohoto produktu a seznam chyb pro popis v obslu n ch manu lech T ma Oprava Hardwarov p ru ka P ipojen tisk rny gt Zapojen do s t Softwarov pr vodce instalac
10. 9 Note O The default community name is public You can use this community name to obtain MIB information O To search for this printer in Smart Organizing Monitor specify public in Get Community Reading the Configuration Page Reading the Configuration Page Settings made in the Printer Configuration dialog box are printed Product Name Displays the product name System Reference Displays the following information about the printer e Printer ID e Total Memory e Firmware Version e Printer Language e Option installation status e Print Cartridge e Transfer Roller e Paper Feed Roller e Fuser Unit lt Paper Input Displays the paper size and type settings e Tray Priority e Bypass Tray e Tray 1 e Tray 2 Maintenance Displays the settings made under the Maintenance menu e Registration e Horiz Tray 1 e Vert Tray 1 e Horiz Tray 2 e Vert Tray 2 e Horiz Bypass Tray e Vert Bypass Tray e Horiz Duplex Type 2 model only e Vert Duplex Type 2 model only 69 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer System Displays the settings made under the System menu e Auto Continue e Copies e Sub Paper Size e Duplex e Blank Page Print e Energy Saver Mode 1 e Energy Saver Mode 2 e Energy Saver Timer e Default Paper Size e Print Error Page e Notification by E mail e Low Humidity Mode PCL Menu Displays settings made under Printer tab in Printer Configuration dia
11. Check there is no air in the envelopes before loading You can print on envelopes with flaps folded or unfolded When using enve lopes with flaps folded check that the flaps are folded properly Load only one size and type of envelope at a time Before loading envelopes flatten their leading edges the edge going into the printer by running a pencil or ruler across them Some kinds of envelope might cause misfeeds wrinkles or print poorly Print quality on envelopes may be uneven if parts of an envelope have differ ent thicknesses Print one or two envelopes to check print quality In a hot and humid environment the envelope might be output creased or im proper printing quality BXG050 55 56 Paper and Other Media 2 Slide the side guides outward then load envelopes with the print side up and push in until it stops against the printer You can print on envelopes with flaps folded or unfolded When using enve lopes with flaps folded check that the flaps are folded properly and there is no air inside BXG054 13 Adjust the side guides to the envelope width BXG069 Loading Paper 5 Lower the green levers on both sides BXG056 Make sure to raise the levers back to their original positions after printing 6 Close the rear cover BXG071 9 Note O After loading envelopes in the tray specify the paper type and size using Smart Organizing Monitor or the printer driver O
12. See p 31 Paper and Other Media e Paper is bent or wrinkled Use paper that has no bents or wrinkles See p 31 Paper and Other Media e Paper has already been printed on See p 31 Paper and Other Media e Paper is damp Use paper that has been stored properly See p 31 Paper and Other Media e The friction pad or paper feed roller might be dirty Clean the relevant component See p 66 Cleaning the Friction Pad and the Paper Feed Roller Prints fall behind the printer when they are output Raise the appropriate stop fence forward fence for A4 rear fence for legal size prints See p 9 Exterior Front View Prints do not stack properly e Paper is damp Use paper that has been stored properly See p 31 Paper and Other Media e Pull out the extender e Raise the appropriate stop fence forward fence for A4 rear fence for legal size prints See p 9 Exterior Front View 79 80 Troubleshooting Status Possible Causes Descriptions and Solutions Multiple pages are fed at once e There may be a gap between the front end paper guide and the paper or between the paper guide both side and the paper in the paper tray Make sure there are no gaps See p 41 Loading Paper e Paper is either too thick or too thin See p 31 Paper and Other Media e Paper has already been printed on See p 31 Paper and Other Medi
13. The installer starts 3 Select an interface language and then click OK The default interface language is English 4 Click PostScript 3 Printer Driver The Add Printer Wizard starts g Click Next gt g Click Local printer and then click Next gt In a Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 environment click Add a local printer 7 Click Create a new port g Click Standard TCP IP Port and then click Next gt The Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears E click Next gt 10 Enter the printer s IPv4 address in the Printer Name or IP Address box and then click OK The IPv4 address you enter here is the address you have checked on the test page In a Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 environment make the following settings in the dialog box that appears and then click Next gt O In Device Type list select an item You can select Autodetect TCP IP Device or Web Services Device Enter an IP address in the Hostname or IP address box If necessary enter a port name in the Port name box If a screen prompting you to specify Device Type appears select the model of your printer and then click Next gt 13 Preparing for Printing click Finish 12 Check that the name of this printer whose driver you want to install is selected and then click Next gt 13 Change the printer name if you want and then click Next gt Select t
14. o 1 path file name c gt lpr S printer s host name P printer name o 1 path file name Software Guide Special Operations under Windows gt Printing Files Directly from Windows gt Printing Commands gt ftp The correct syntax for the ftp command is as follows ftp gt put path file name Option ftp gt mput path file name path file name Software Guide Special Operations under Windows gt Printing Files Directly from Windows gt Printing Commands gt ftp User and Password for transferring data by ftp are both fixed to sysadm To transfer data by ftp enter sysadm the Printer gt Unpacking Quick Installation Guide 2 Unpacking Topic Errors Correction Hardware Guide 5 Remove the protective material 5 Remove the protective material Installing the Printer and Options gt Installing attached inside the printer attached inside the printer BxGOIE The following descriptions do not apply to this machine Topic Errors Hardware Guide Connecting the Printer gt Network Connection HE important Use shielded Ethernet cable Unshielded cables electromagnetic interference that could cause malfunctions create Hardware Guide Paper and Other Media gt Paper Recommendations gt Types of Paper and Other Media gt Types of paper Hardware Guide Paper and Other Media gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray gt Loadi
15. In no event will the company be li able for direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper ating the machine For good print quality the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law bank notes revenue stamps bonds stock certificates bank drafts checks passports driver s licenses The preceding listis meant as a guide only and is not inclusive We assume no responsibility for its com pleteness or accuracy If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items consult with your legal advisor Notes Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine Certain options might not be available in some countries For details please contact your local dealer Depending on which country you are in certain units may be optional F or details please contact your local dealer TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Printer acilia 1 How to Read This Manual iii 2 A 2 Printer Types ina ae 3 1 Preparing for Printing Confirming the Connection Method uu
16. Include this location in the search check box and then click Browse 19 20 Preparing for Printing g Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver are stored If the CD ROM drive is D the source files of the PostScript 3 printer driver are stored in the following location D DRIVERS PS XP_VISTA Language DISK1 O Check the printer driver location and then click OK 10 Click Next gt click Finish If the printer driver has already been installed plug and play is enabled and the icon of the printer connected to the USB001 port is added to the Printers window 9 Note O To disable Auto Run press the Shift key when inserting the CD ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD ROM O The number after USB varies depending on the number of printers con nected O The USB port is available only for the printer driver that is installed first To install additional drivers for this printer install them using other ports such as LPT1 Then after the installation change the port settings to the specified USB port Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 Elmportant O To install this printer driver you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission Log on as an Administrators group member If the printer driver is already installed and plug and play is enabled the ico
17. W hlen Sie das Markierungsfeld Nach Netzwerkdruckern suchen und klicken Sie dann auf Weiter gt Wenn die Liste der gefundenen Drucker erscheint klicken Sie auf diesen Drucker und klicken Sie dann auf Weiter gt Doppelklicken Sie falls notwendig auf den Drucker um seine Einstellungen anzuzeigen und zu konfigurieren und klicken Sie dann auf Fortsetzen Wenn eine Meldung erscheint dass die Installation erfolgreich abgeschlossen wurde klicken Sie auf Fertig stellen Hinweis Falls die Einstellung der IP Adresse oder die Druckersuche fehlschl gt vergewissern Sie sich bitte dass der Drucker an dasselbe Netzwerksegment wie der PC angeschlossen ist Guide d installation du logiciel pour une connexion r seau Guida all installazione del software con una connessione di rete Ce manuel d crit bri vement la proc dure d installation du pilote d impression dans un environnement r seau Si vous utilisez cette imprimante avec le cable USB consultez le Manuel du logiciel pour installation du pilote d impression Pour une utilisation correcte assurez vous de lire le Guide d installation rapide et de configurer les param tres d crits dans le guide Les quatre tapes suivantes sont requises pour utiliser cette imprimante 1 Impression d une page de test 2 Installation de Smart Organizing Monitor si n cessaire 3 Sp cification de l adresse IP de I imprimante si n cessaire 4 Installation du p
18. ftp gt mput C PRINT filel C PRINT file2 B Quit ftp ftp gt bye 9 Note O _ and cannot be used for file names File names will be read as option strings O For mput command option cannot be defined O For mput command and can be used as wild cards in file names O When printing a binary file in ASCII mode print may not come out correctly 77 78 Special Operations under Windows This chapter explains how to use this printer under Mac OS X The example procedures in this chapter explain configuration under Mac OS X 10 4 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver kimportant O If you want to use this printer in a Mac OS environment update to Mac OS 10 2 8 or higher E insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive 2 Double click the CD ROM icon E Double click the Mac OS X folder O Double click the PPD Installer folder B Double click the package file icon 6 Follow the instructions on the screen 79 80 Mac OS X Configuration Specifying the Printer This section explains how to configure this printer using Printer Setup Utility Using USB Use this procedure to connect the computer to the printer via USB The printer is automatically added if the connection is successfully detected O Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable and then turn the printer s power switch to on 2 Start Printer Setup Utility Under Mac OS X 10
19. grehajtotta a m veletet folytassa az adott tmutat k vetkez l p s vel EU tagorsz gok felhaszn l i FIGYELEM Megfelel en rny kolt s f ldelt k beleket s csatlakoz kat kell haszn lni a gazdasz m t g phez s vagy a perif ri khoz val csatlakoztat shoz a kibocs t si hat r rt kek betart sa rdek ben Felhaszn l k az USA ban FIGYELEM Megfelel en rny kolt s f ldelt k beleket s csatlakoz kat kell haszn lni a gazdasz m t g phez s vagy a perif ri khoz val csatlakoztat shoz az FCC kibocs t si hat r rt kek betart sa rdek ben sszes felhaszn l A Az ethernet k belhez val ferritmag e k sz l k tartoz ka K pezzen hurkot az ethernet k bel m sik v g n kb 5 cm re a k sz l kt l R gz tse a ferritmagot B Csatlakoztassa az ethernet k belt a nyomtat h toldal n tal lhat ethernet porthoz A k belt a ferritmag fel li v g vel csatlakoztassa a nyomtat hoz C A k bel m sik v g t csatlakoztassa a h l zathoz p ld ul egy hub seg ts g vel axon Hardver tmutat Pap r s egy b hordoz k gt Pap rral kapcsolatos javaslatok gt Pap r bet lt se A pap r bet lt sekor mindig v gezze el a pap radagol pap rt pus s m ret be ll t s t a Smart Organizing Monitor vagy a Web Image Monitor seg ts g vel Ha a nyomtat s a nyomtat illeszt be ll t sai nem egyeznek lehets ges hogy a nyomt
20. gt Types de papier et autres supports gt Types de papier Manuel du mat riel Papier et autres supports gt Chargement du papier gt Chargement du papier dans le Bypass gt Chargement des enveloppes Evitez d utiliser des enveloppes autocollantes Elles peuvent entra ner un dysfonctionnement de l imprimante Manuel du mat riel D pannage gt Messages d erreur amp d tat dans Smart Organizing Monitor Chargez un papier de format ad quat dans le magasin puis modifiez le param tre de format papier l aide de Smart Organizing Monitor Manuel du logiciel Autres op rations d impression gt Assemblage 9 Remarque Si une reprise automatique est effectu e sur le premier exemplaire l assemblage est annul Si un saut d alimentation se produit sur le premier jeu la fonction Assemblage est annul e Reference Pour plus d informations sur la m thode d impression consultez le fichier d aide du pilote d impression 6 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Note per gli utenti je Page 7 of 32 Queste note forniscono informazioni aggiuntive sull uso del prodotto e la correzione di alcuni errori riportati nei manuali di istruzioni per l uso Argomento Correzione Guida per l hardware Collegamento della stampante gt Connessione di rete Guida all installazione del software con una connessione di rete 1 Stampa di una
21. netvaerksforbindelse 1 Udskrivning af en testside Folgende procedure er n dvendig efter trin 1 i hardwarevejledningen og for tin 1 i softwareinstallationsvejledningen til netverksforbindelsen Nar proceduren er udfort skal du fortsatte til de neste trin i den enkelte vejledning Brugere i EU NroRsIGTIG Der skal bruges korrekt afskeermede og jordede kabler og stik ved tilslutning til en vertscomputer og eller tilh rende udstyr hvis emissionskravene skal overholdes Brugere i USA FORSIGTIG Der skal bruges korrekt afsk rmede og jordede kabler og stik ved tilslutning til en v rtscomputer og eller tilh rende udstyr hvis FCC emissionskravene skal overholdes Alle brugere A Maskinen leveres med en ferritkerne til Ethernet kablet Lav en l kke p kablet ca 5 cm 2 tommer fra den ende som tilsluttes maskinen Fastg r ferritkernen B Tilslut Ethernet kablet til Ethernet porten bag p printeren Tilslut kabelenden med ferritkernen til printeren C Tilslut den anden ende af kablet til netv rket f eks ved hj lp af en hub Hardwarevejledning Papir og andre medier gt Anbefalet papir gt Tlegning af papir N r du har lagt papir i en kassette skal du altid indstille papirtypen og formatet for kassetten med Smart Organizing Monitor eller Web Image Monitor Hvis indstillingerne p printeren og printerdriveren ikke er de samme bliver udskriftsresultaterne m ske ikke som forventet
22. page appears on the main area 2 Tab area Contains menus for the Status and Counter modes and tabs for switching between them 3 Help Use Help to view help file contents 4 Main area Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area The printer information in the main area is not automatically updated Click Refresh at the upper right in the main area to update the printer information Click the Web browser s Refresh but ton to refresh the entire browser screen Changing the Interface Language Select the desired interface language from the Web Language list 40 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Checking the System Information Click Home to display the main page of Web Image Monitor You can check the current system information on this page This page contains three tabs Status Counter and Machine Information Checking the Status Information Click the Status tab on the main page to display system information paper tray status and toner levels Item Description Model Name Shows the name of the printer Location Shows the location of the printer as registered on the SNMP page Contact Shows the contact information of the printer as registered on the SNMP page Host Name Shows the host name specified in Host Name on the DNS page Status Shows the current messages on the printer s display lt Print Cartridge amp
23. 10 3 or lower manufacturer from the Printer Model pop up menu 4 Select the connected printer from the list of printer models and then click Add E Quit Printer Setup Utility 83 Mac OS X Configuration Setting Up Options Use this procedure to configure the printer s options O Start Printer Setup Utility Under Mac OS X 10 5 start System Preferences and click Print amp FAX Under Mac OS X 10 3 click Print amp FAX in System Preferences and then click Set Up Printers Under Mac OS X 10 2 8 start Print Center The printer list appears 2 Select this printer e Mac OS X 10 5 Click Options amp Supplies e Mac OS X 10 4 Click Printer Setup and then proceed to step 4 e Mac OS X 10 3 or lower Click Show Info E Select Installable Options or Driver 4 Select the option you want to set up and then select an appropriate setting for it B Click Apply Changes or OK g Exit Printer Setup Utility 9 Note O If the option you want to select is not displayed PPD files may not be set up correctly To complete the setup check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box 84 Setting Up for Printing Setting Up for Printing Use the following procedures to configure the printer Making paper settings from an application 1 Open the file you want to print E on the File menu click Page Setup E Check that the printer you want t
24. Be sure to load envelopes so that their flaps are on the left If you do not the envelopes will become creased O If printed envelopes come out badly creased load the envelopes in the op posite direction and then rotate the print object by 180 degrees using the printer driver before printing For details see the printer driver Help P Reference For details about supported types of paper see p 31 Supported Paper for Each Tray For details about specifying the paper type and size see Software Guide 57 58 Paper and Other Media hi DRE 5 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Print Cartridge A WARNING Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame Dispose used toner contain ers in accordance with local regulations Do not store toner used toner or toner containers in a place with an open flame The toner might ignite and cause burns of a fire e Keep the polythene materials bags gloves etc supplied with this machine away from babies and small children at all times Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into contact with the mouth or nose A CAUTION Keep toner used or unused and toner containers out of reach of children If toner or used toner is inhaled gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air environment Consult a doctor if necessary Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when r
25. DE DD FR ER IT AD ESED NLAD PT PD PT GR M012 8617 IL SERRER Print_M0128617 indd 2 Nota para el administrador Este manual se ha elaborado para proporcionar informaci n adicional a los administradores sobre las funciones de seguridad de la impresora Lea este manual y el Manual de software Este manual y su contenido est n limitados a los administradores y s lo ellos pueden acceder a los mismos Contrasena Cuando inicie sesi n en la impresora deber introducir la contrasefia o el c digo de acceso Le recomendamos cambiar la contrasefia o el c digo de acceso de f brica inmediatamente a fin de evitar la fuga de informaci n y las operaciones no autorizadas por parte de terceros Deber introducir la contrase a o el c digo de acceso cada vez que intente realizar lo siguiente O Cambiar los ajustes de la impresora configurados a trav s de Web Image Monitor O Cambiar los ajustes de la impresora de un administrador a trav s de S mart Organizing Monitor Para utilizar la contrase a o el c digo de acceso de f brica deje el campo de la contrase a en blanco cuando utilice Web Image Monitor Cuando utilice Smart Organizing Monitor introduzca Admin como c digo de acceso Para cambiar la contrase a de Web Image Monitor y S mart Organizing Monitor deber iniciar sesi n como Administrador y despu s realizar los ajustes necesarios Referencia Para obtener detalles sobre la configurac
26. Monitor for 3400 Series Status The Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box appears In a Windows 2000 environment point to Programs on the Start menu and then point to Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series gt Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series Status E Click IP Address The IP Address Setting dialog box appears 4 In the MAC Address box enter the printer s MAC address that was printed on the test page Then in the IP Address box enter the IP address you want to set for the printer Enter the subnet mask and gateway address if necessary E click ok A confirmation message appears 0 click ok 7 Click Close to close the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box Installing the Printer Driver in a Network Environment Installing the printer driver Use the following procedure to install the printer driver O On the Printer Drivers and Utilities dialog box click PCL 6 Printer Driver If you have already closed the Printer Drivers and Utilities dialog box launch Setup exe from the CD ROM root directory The software license agreement appears BD After reading the agreement click I accept the agreement and then click Next gt E In the dialog box that appears select the Search for network printers check box and then click Next gt If the search fails the printer driver is installed via port LPT1 Check the port settings and printer s IP address again before rec
27. Nesouhlas li nastaven tisk rny a ovlada e tisk rny nemus b t v sledky tisku dle o ek v n Hardwarov p ru ka Pap r a dal m dia gt Vkl d n pap ru gt Vkl d n pap ru do bo n ho z sobn ku gt Vkl d n ob lek P i tisku na ob lky je vlo te tak jak jsou p ipraveny v balen bu s otev en mi nebo zav en mi klopami P ed dopln n m ob lek je stiskn te tak aby byly maxim ln ploch Hardwarov p ru ka Dodatek gt Technick daje gt Hlavn jednotka Bezpe nostn informace Z kony a vyhl ky gt Laserov bezpe nost Produkt vyhovuje n sleduj c m bezpe nostn m standard m Toto za zen vyhovuje po adavk m IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 pro t du 1 laserov ch produkt Softwarov p ru ka P prava pro tisk gt Nastaven mo nost pro tisk rnu gt Je li obousm rn komunikace vypnuta Nen li zvoleno Povolit obousm rnou komunikaci Smart Organizing Monitor nelze pou t Pro pou it software zvolte Povolit obousm rnou komunikaci Softwarov p ru ka Ostatn tiskov operace gt Pokud vzniknou probl my se zadan m form tem a typem pap ru Dojde li k chyb tisku nelze nastaven pomoc Smart Organizing Monitor zm nit Softwarov p ru ka Monitorov n a konfigurace tisk rny gt Pou v n n stroje Web Image Monitor gt Kontrola informac o syst mu gt Kontrola daj
28. Not Supported by This Printer Avoid using the following paper as they are not supported by this printer Paper meant for an ink jet printer Bent folded or creased paper Curled or twisted paper Torn paper Wrinkled paper Damp paper Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity Paper that has already been printed onto except a preprinted letterhead Malfunctions are especially likely when using paper printed on by other than a laser printer e g monochrome and color copiers ink jet printers etc Special paper such as thermal paper aluminum foil carbon paper and con ductive paper Paper whose weight is heavier or lighter than the limitation Paper with windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Adhesive label paper on which the adhesive underlayer or base paper is exposed Paper with clips or staples Do not use ink jet printer paper because it may stick to the fusing unit and cause a paper jam Do not use paper that has already been printed onto by other printers 9 Note O Even supported types of paper may cause paper jams or malfunctions if the paper is not in good condition Paper Recommendations Print Area The following shows the print area for this printer Be sure to set the print mar gins correctly by the application Paper AO IT e 7 Vo 9 1 BSP056S Print area Feed direction Approximately 4 2 mm 0 17 inches O Approximately 4 2 mm 0 17 i
29. PCL related settings can be modified in this area 13 Using Smart Organizing Monitor under the Macintosh Environment Appendix Trademarks e Apple Macintosh and Mac are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc in the United States and other countries e Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights to those marks Copyright O 2009 EN EN CUS M012 8605 Model No SP 3400N SP 3410DN Information Introduction This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine For your safety and benefit read this manual carefully before using the machine Keep this manual in a handy place for quick reference Important Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice In no event will the company be liable for direct indirect special incidental or consequen tial damages as a result of handling or operating the machine Notes Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine Certain options might not be available in some countries For details please con tact your local dealer Depending on which country you are in certain units may be optional For de tails please contact your local dealer Caution For good print quality the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier The sup
30. Paper 1 or Thick Paper 2 Color paper Item Description Paper thickness 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 0 Ib Supported paper tray Any input tray can be used Duplex supported size A4 Legal 81 2 x 14 Letter 8 2 x 11 Notes If the paper thickness is outside the specified range select Thin Paper Thick Paper 1 or Thick Paper 2 35 Paper and Other Media lt Preprinted paper Item Description Paper thickness 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 0 Ib Supported paper tray Any input tray can be used Duplex supported size A4 Legal 81 2 x 14 Letter 8 2 x 11 Notes If the paper thickness is outside the specified range select Thin Paper Thick Paper 1 or Thick Paper 2 Prepunched paper Item Description Paper thickness 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 0 Ib Supported paper tray Any input tray can be used Duplex supported size A4 Legal 81 2 x 14 Letter 81 2 x 11 Notes If the paper thickness is outside the specified range select Thin Paper Thick Paper 1 or Thick Paper 2 4 Letterhead Item Description Paper thickness 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 0 Ib Supported paper tray Any input tray can be used Duplex supported size AA Legal 8 2 x 14 Letter 81 2 x 11 Notes Paper that has a thickness outside the specified range cannot be printe
31. Replaceable Parts Information Item Description Black Toner Shows the amount of black toner remaining Fuser Unit Shows the remaining life of the fuser unit Transfer Roller Unit Shows the remaining life of the transfer roller unit Paper Feed Roller Unit Shows the remaining life of the paper feed roller unit Using Web Image Monitor Paper Tray Item Description Tray 1 Shows the current state and paper size type setting of tray 1 Tray 2 Shows the current state and paper size type setting of tray 2 Bypass Tray Shows the current state and paper size type setting of the bypass tray 9 Note O The information about tray 2 appears only when it is installed O If a non genuine print cartridge is installed toner life cannot be reliably indicated y Reference For details about location and contact information see p 49 Configuring the SNMP Settings Checking the Counter Information Click the Counter tab on the main page to check the counter information Home ome lt Printer Counter Item Description Page Total Shows the total number of pages printed using the printer driver lists reports printed from the Reports Print menu lt Duplex Item Description Duplex Total Page Shows the total number of pages printed on both sides 9 Note I Duplex counter appears for the Type 2 model only O A sheet pri
32. Select to enable Multicast DNS via UDP port 5353 If disabled the item below cannot be configured Printer Name Enter the name of the printer Can contain up to 32 characters Using Web Image Monitor Configuring the DNS Settings Click the DNS tab on the network settings page to configure the DNS settings DNS Settings Item Description DNS Method Select whether to specify domain name serv ers manually or receive DNS information from the network automatically When set to Auto the items below become unavailable Primary DNS Server Enter the IP address of the primary DNS Secondary DNS Server Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS Domain Name Enter the domain name for the printer Can contain up to 32 characters DNS Timeout Seconds Enter the number of seconds the printer waits before considering a DNS request to have timed out 5 to 100 Host Name Enter a host name for the printer Can contain up to 15 characters 47 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Configuring the Alert Message Settings Click the Alert Messages tab on the network settings page to configure the alert message settings E lt Alert 1 Alert 2 Item Description Display Name Enter a sender name for alert e mail Can contain up to 32 characters Email Address Enter the address of the recipient of the alert e mail Can contain up to 64 charact
33. The printer driver for the 64 bit Windows is not included on the supplied CD ROM If your operating system is the 64 bit Windows download the drivers from the supplier s Web site and then store the files in an easily accessible folder Preparing for Printing Installing the Printer Driver in a Network Environment This section explains how to install the printer driver that allows you to use this printer in a network environment Installing the PCL Printer Driver The following four steps are required to use this printer in the network environ ment Print the test page Install Smart Organizing Monitor if necessary Specify the printer s IP address if necessary O Install the printer driver 9 Note O If the printer is obtaining its IP address automatically from a DHCP server you do not need to perform 2 Install Smart Organizing Monitor and 3 Specify the printer s IP address Printing a test page To install the printer driver you must first confirm the printer s IP address If the printer is not obtaining its IP address automatically from a DHCP server enter the MAC address printed on the test page as the IP address in Smart Or ganizing Monitor Make sure the network cable is properly connected to the printer before you print the test page O Turn the printer s power switch to off and then wait a few seconds B while pressing down the Job Reset key turn the printer s power switch back to
34. This manual is intended to provide administrators with additional information about the security functions of this printer Read this manual as well as Software Guide This manual and its contents should be kept by and restricted to administrators Password When you log on to this printer you will be prompted to enter the password or access code We strongly recommend you to change the factory default password or access code immediately to prevent information leakage and unauthorized operations by others You will be prompted to enter your password or access code when you attemptto do any of the following O Change printer settings configured using Web Image Monitor O Change an administrator s printer settings using Smart Organizing Monitor To use the factory default password or access code leave the password blank when using Web Image Monitor When using Smart Organizing monitor enter Admin as the access code To Change password for Web Image Monitor and Smart Organizing Monitor you need to log on as an Administrator and then make the necessary settings Reference For details about setting a password see Web Image Monitor or Smart Organizing Monitor Help Remarque a l attention de l administrateur Ce manuel a t con u pour fournir aux administrateurs des informations compl mentaires sur les fonctions de s curit de cette imprimante Lisez ce manuel ainsi que le Manuel du logiciel Ce manuel et
35. Verf gung zu stellen Lesen Sie dieses Handbuch sowie die Software Anleitung Dieses Handbuch und seine Inhalte sollten nur an Administratoren weitergegeben werden Passwort Wenn Sie sich bei diesem Drucker anmelden werden Sie dazu aufgefordert das Passwort oder den Zugriffscode einzugeben Wir empfehlen dringend umgehend das werkseitig eingestellte Passwort oder den Zugriffscode zu andern um den Verlust von Informationen und den unberechtigten Betrieb durch Andere zu verhindern Sie werden dazu aufgefordert Ihr Passwort oder Ihren Zugriffscode einzugeben wenn Sie versuchen einen der folgenden Vorgange durchzuf hren O ndern der Druckereinstelllungen die unter Verwendung von Web Image Monitor konfiguriert wurden O ndern der Druckereinstellungen eines Administrators unter Verwendung von Smart Organizing Monitor Zum Verwenden des werkseitig eingestellten Passworts oder Zugriffscodes lassen Sie das Passwort leer wenn Sie den Web Image Monitor verwenden Geben Sie bei Verwendung des Smart Organizing Monitor als Zugriffscode Admin ein Um das Passwort f r den Web Image Monitor und den Smart Organizing Monitor zu ndern m ssen Sie sich als Administrator anmelden und dann die notwendigen Einstellungen vornehmen Referenz F r weitere Informationen zum Erstellen eines Passworts siehe die Hilfefunktion des Web Image Monitor oder des Smart Organizing Monitor Nota per l amministratore Il presente man
36. WcnpasneHo PyxoBo cTBOo no annapatHomy 06ecneyenuio Bomonmume credyioujue Oelicmeua nocne waea 1 pyrosodemea no Coennnenne npHHTepa gt Ceresoe annapamuomy obecneuenuo u nepe wazom l pyrosodemea no COEAHHEHHE ycmanoeke npozpammnozo obecneuenua dra nodkmouenua Iocne amozo nepexodume K darbHneiuum de cmeusam ONUCAHHbIM 6 pyrocodcmeax Mura noxb30Barene B EC NBHVMAHME Hua cooTBeTCTBHS Tpe6oBaHH M NMO HPENENBHO JONYCTHMBIM BbI pocam IPH COCIMHEHUH C XOCT KOMMbIOTepoM u n c nepupepu HeIM YCTPOHCTBOM HEO XOMHMO 1HCIIOJIB30BATE COOTBETCTBYIOWMe IKpaHMpoBaHHble 3a3eMJeHHble Kabemn H YNEKTPHYECKHE COCAHHHTENH Aura nonb30BaTene B CHIA NBHUMAHUE Hua COOTBETCTBHA TPe6OBAHHAM DeyepasbHOl KOMHCCHH CBA3H HO TpeJJembHo JIONYCTHMBIM BbIOpocaM TIpH coeqHHeHHH C XOCT KOMIIBIOTEPOM H HJIM C HEPHPePH HLIM YCTPO CTBOM HEO XOAHMO UCHMOJIB3OBATE COOTBETCTBYIOMIME IKPAHHPOBAHHLIE M 3A3EMIIEHHBIE kaOesIH H 9JIEKTPHIeCKHe COCIHHHTENM Mura Bcex n0JIb30BaTeJe A C JHaH mBIM armaparom TIOCTABJIACTCA beppuroBbI CEPIEYHHK Ja HHTeppeiicHoro ka6ens Ethernet Ha paccrosnna OKOJO 5 CM 2 roma crea re Ha ka6exe reno 1 or konna KaOeJIA CO CTOPOHBI armapara B Tlogcoequnute Kaeb Ethernet x mopry Ethernet pacnonoxeHHoMy Ha 3aJIHeli YacTH NpHHTepa TloqcoequHute KoHeL aberta C DeppuTOBBIM CEPJIEYHHKOM K IIPHHTEPY C Iloncoenumure Apyro KoHell Kaea K cCeTH HMCIOJIB3yA HallpHMep KOHIICHTPATOP avo PykoB
37. When the cartridge can go no fur ther raise it slightly and push it fully in Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place BXG060 89 90 Removing Misfed Paper 7 Using both hands carefully push up the front cover until it closes BXG061 9 Note O When closing the front cover push the upper area of the cover firmly After closing the cover check that the error is cleared Removing Jammed Paper from the Exit Area Duplex Unit Use the following procedure to remove paper that has become jammed in the exit area or inside the duplex unit A CAUTION The inside of this machine becomes very hot Do not touch parts labelled A indicating a hot surface O Open the rear cover BXG069 When Paper is Jammed 2 Remove the jammed paper carefully BXG070 BXG071 O Pull tray 1 halfway out and check for jammed paper If there is jammed paper remove it carefully 8 BXG073 91 92 Removing Misfed Paper 5 Pull tray 1 out completely with both hands Place the tray on a flat surface G Push the blue lever Pushing the blue lever lowers the duplex transport unit BSP237S 7 If there is jammed paper carefully remove it BSP120S When Paper is Jammed 8 With the duplex transport unit still lowered carefully slide tray 1 back in until it stops BXG040 O If paper is loaded in the bypass tray remove
38. a caution message appears press the Stop Start key Note O If you want to print after adding paper to the tray load the correct paper and then press the Stop Start key O If a tray with a smaller paper size is selected the print job may be cut short or other problems may occur Canceling a Print Job Follow the procedure below to cancel a print job that is related to the printer error occurred 1 If the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box appears with a caution message press the Job Reset key 3 32 Other Print Operations Canceling a Print Job This section gives instruction to stop printing from the control panel or computer Canceling a Print Job Using the Control Panel You can cancel a print job using the control panel if transferring print jobs is not completed O Press the Job Reset key Canceling a Print Job from the Computer You can cancel a print job from the computer if the transferring print job is not completed 1 Double click the printer icon on the Windows task tray A window appears showing all print jobs currently queued for printing Check the current status of the job you want to cancel 2 Select the name of the job you want to cancel click the Document menu and then click Cancel 9 Note I You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed For this reason printing may continue for a few pages after you cancel printing O A print job containi
39. available only for the printer driver that is installed first To install additional drivers for this printer install them using other ports such as LPT1 Then after the installation change the port settings to the specified USB port Troubleshooting USB Problem Solutions The printer is not recognized automatically Turn off the power of the printer reconnect the USB cable and then turn it on again Windows has already configured the USB Open Windows Device Manager and then settings under Universal Serial Bus controllers remove any conflicting devices Conflicting devices have a or icon by them Take care not to accidentally remove required devices For details see Windows Help When using Windows 2000 XP Vista or Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 an erroneous device is displayed under USB Controller in the Device Manager dialog box An error occurs during software installation First reboot Windows Then on the Start menu select Control Panel Double click the System icon and then on the Hardware tab click Device Manager Under Other Devices select the printer and then open its properties dialog box On the General tab click Reinstall Driver to reinstall the driver 21 22 Preparing for Printing If a Message Appears during Installation When a message that shows the number 58 or 34 appears during the installation the printer driver cannot be install
40. can select Off First Page Only or All Pages Using Smart Organizing Monitor Using Smart Organizing Monitor This section explains about using Smart Organizing Monitor under Mac OS X Using Smart Organizing Monitor you can check the printer status and change printer settings from your client computer The following operations are possible with Smart Organizing Monitor e Displaying printer status or settings e Printing a list of printer configurations e Making settings for paper loaded into each input tray e Making input tray settings e Changing factory set default settings e Making network protocol settings e Making printer settings e Displaying the printer status and supply information e Making SMTP Settings e Making SNMP Settings e Making Alert Settings e Making PCL Settings Installing Smart Organizing Monitor Follow the procedure below to install Smart Organizing Monitor under Mac OS X E insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive E Double click the CD ROM icon E Double click the Mac OS X folder O Double click the Utility folder 5 Double click the package file icon 6 Follow the instructions on the screen Displaying the Smart Organizing Monitor Dialog Box To display the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box double click Smart Organizing Monitor in the Applications folder 89 90 Mac OS X Configuration Displaying the Printer Status In the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog bo
41. de Instalaci n R pida y realice los ajustes descritos all Los siguientes cuatro pasos son necesarios para utilizar la impresora 1 Impresi n de una p gina de prueba 2 Instalaci n de Smart Organizing Monitor si fuera necesario 3 Especificaci n de la direcci n IP de la impresora si fuera necesario 4 Instalaci n del controlador de la impresora Nota Sila impresora obtiene la direcci n IP autom ticamente de un servidor DHCP no necesita realizar los pasos 2 Instalaci n de Smart Organizing Monitor ni 3 Especificaci n de la direcci n IP de la impresora Impresi n de una p gina de prueba Conecte la impresora al ordenador por medio de un cable Ethernet Mientras pulsa la tecla Cancelar trabajo lleve el interruptor hasta la posici n de encendido y mantenga pulsada la tecla hasta que el indicador de Alerta comience a parpadear La impresi n comienza aproximadamente 30 segundos despu s de que el indicador de Alerta comienza a parpadear Compruebe la direcci n IP de la impresora desde la p gina de prueba impresa Referencia Tambi n puede utilizar Web Image Monitor para cambiar la direcci n IP obtenida del servidor DHCP Para acceder a Web Image Monitor utilice la direcci n IP impresa en la p gina de prueba Para obtener m s informaci n acerca de Web Image Monitor consulte el Manual de software Instalaci n de Smart Organizing Monitor Cierre todos los pr
42. della stampante utilizzando una connessione locale vedere la Guida software Para obtener detalles sobre la conexi n e instalaci n del controlador de la impresora al utilizar una conexi n en red consulte la Gu a de instalaci n de software para conexi n en red Para obtener detalles sobre la conexi n e instalaci n del controlador de la impresora al utilizar una conexi n local consulte el Manual de software Voor meer informatie over het aansluiten en installeren van het printerstuurprogramma bij cen netwerkverbinding raadpleeg de Software installatiehandleiding voor netwerkverbindingen Voor meer informatie over het aansluiten en installeren van het printerstuurprogramma bij een lokale verbinding raadpleeg de Softwarehandleiding BXG036 BXG019 BXG031 BXG109 DAL B5 AS e n BXG108 Copyright 2009 Printed in China ENGB ENUS DEDE FRED ITAD ESED NLND PTPDPTER M012 8609 Quick Installation Guide Guide d installation rapide Gu a de Instalaci n R pida Guia de Instala o R pida Kurzanleitung zur Installation Guida di installazione rapida Verkorte Installatiehandleiding Guia de Instala o R pida Print_M0128609 indd 2 2009 10 20 10 53 15 Col 00000060 Soe SP 3400N SP 3410DN Operating Instructions Hardware Guide Guide to the Printer Installing the Printer and Options Connecting the Printer Paper and Other Media Replacing Consumables
43. di causare malfunzionamenti Guida per l hardware Carta e altri supporti gt Consigli relativi alla carta gt Tipi di carta e altri supporti gt Tipi di carta Guida per l hardware Carta e altri supporti gt Caricamento della carta gt Caricamento di carta nel vassoio bypass gt Caricamento di buste Non usare buste autoadesive Potrebbero causare malfunzionamenti della stampante Guida per l hardware Risoluzione dei problemi gt Messaggi di errore e di stato sullo Smart Organizing Monitor Caricare la carta del formato selezionato e modificare l impostazione del formato carta tramite Smart Organizing Monitor Guida software Altre operazioni di stampa gt Fascicolazione RZ Nota Se nel primo fascicolo viene eseguita una ripresa automatica la Fascicolazione verr annullata Se nel primo fascicolo viene eseguito un avanzamento pagina la funzione Fascicolazione verr annullata Riferimento Per ulteriori informazioni sul metodo di stampa consultare la Guida del driver della stampante 8 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 9 of 32 Bemeerkninger til brugerne Her findes yderligere oplysninger om brugen af dette produkt samt rettelser til nogle af de procedurer der omtales i vejledningerne Emne Rettelse Hardwarevejledning Tilslutning af printeren gt Netverksforbindelse Softwareinstallationsvejledning til
44. dotycz ce papieru gt Typy papieru i inne no niki gt Typy papieru Podr cznik sprz tu Papier i pozosta e materia y gt adowanie papieru gt adowanie papieru do tacy r cznej gt adowanie kopert Nie nale y u ywa kopert samoprzylepnych spowodowa niew a ciwe dzia anie drukarki Mog one Podr cznik sprz tu Rozwi zywanie problem w gt Komunikaty b du i stanu w programie Smart Organizing Monitor Za aduj do kasety papier w wybranym rozmiarze a nast pnie zmie rozmiar papieru za pomoc Smart Organizing Monitor Podr cznik oprogramowania Inne funkcje drukowania gt Sortowanie 9 Uwaga Jesli dla pierwszego zestawu zostanie zastosowana funkcja automatycznej kontynuacji sortowanie zostanie anulowane Jesli dla pierwszego zestawu zostanie zastosowana funkcja wysuwu stron sortowanie zostanie anulowane Zajrze do instrukcji Szczeg owe informacje dotycz ce metody drukowania zawiera Pomoc do sterownika drukarki 28 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 29 of 32 MpumesaHua ana nonb3oBatenen Om IPHMEYAHHA IIPENOCTABJIIHOT JOMOJIHUTCJIBHY O HHbopMmanm o NO 9KCIJIVaTANHH HaHHOrO IIPOAyYKTA a TakxKe CIIHCOK ONCUATOK MOIYIIEHHBIX IPM ONHCaAHHH almapaTa B PyKOBOJCTBAX I0JIb30BATEJA PykoBOACTBO NO ycTaHoBKe IIporpaMMHOoro o6ecHeyeHHuN AJIA NOAKIIOUeHHA 1 1leyaTb TecToBoit CTpaHHLBI Tema
45. down turn the printer back on keeping the key pressed until the Alert indicator flashes once Printing starts approximately 30 seconds after the Alert indicator starts flashing 2 Job Reset key Press this key to cancel a job that is print ing out You can also use this key to print a test page To print the test page turn the printer off and then while pressing and holding this key down turn the printer back on keeping the key pressed until the Alert indicator flashes once Printing starts approximately 30 seconds after the Alert indicator starts flashing P Reference BXG220 3 Alert Indicator Lights up whenever a printer error occurs Use Smart Organizing Monitor to check the error 4 Ready Indicator Lights up when the printer is ready to receive data from a computer Flashes when the printer is warming up or re ceiving data 5 Replace Print Cartridge Indicator Blinks when the toner amount is ap proaching exhaustion Lights up when the toner is empty 6 Load Paper Indicator Lights up when a paper tray is empty or unattached For printing the configuration page see Software Guide a popo 2 Installing the Printer and Options Installing the Printer This section describes how to install the printer and perform settings after instal lation Where to Put the Printer The printer s location should be carefully chosen because environmental condi tions greatly affect its perfor
46. es necess rias Refer ncia Para mais informa es acerca da defini o da palavra passe consulte a Ajuda do Web Image Monitor ou do Smart Organizing Monitor Opmerking voor beheerder Deze handleiding is bedoeld om beheerders extra informatie te geven over de beveiligingsfuncties van deze printer Lees zowel deze handleiding als de Softwarehandleiding Deze handleiding en zijn inhoud moeten uitsluitend door beheerders worden bewaard Wachtwoord Wanneer u inlogt op deze printer wordt u gevraagd om een wachtwoord of toegangscode in te voeren We raden u ten zeerste aan het standaard wachtwoord of de toegangscode onmiddellijk te wijzigen om te voorkomen dat er informatie uitlekt of dat derden onbevoegde handelingen kunnen uitvoeren U wordt altijd gevraagd uw wachtwoord of toegangscode in te voeren wanneer u n van de volgende handelingen probeert te verrichten O Printerinstellingen die geconfigureerd werden met Web Image Monitor wijzigen O Printerinstellingen van de beheerder wijzigen met Smart Organizing Monitor Als u het standaard wachtwoord of de toegangscode wilt gebruiken wanneer u gebruik maakt van Web Image Monitor dan moet u het wachtwoordveld blanco laten Wanneer u Smart Organizing Monitor gebruikt voertu Admin in als de toegangscode Om het wachtwoord voor Web Image Monitor en Smart Organizing Monitor te wijzigen moet u aanloggen als beheerder en vervolgens de nodige instell
47. for the interface and a product and then click OK 4 Click Install manuals g Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation Click Finish when the installation is completed E click Exit 9 Note O If you are using a computer running a Windows operating system the CD ROM opens automatically However AutoRun may not work under cer tain operating system settings If this is the case launch setup exe from the CD ROM root directory Opening Manuals This section describes how to open the manuals There are three ways to view the manuals Opening from the desktop icon Follow the procedure below to open the manuals from the desktop icon 1 Double click the manual icon on your desktop The manual opens Opening from the Start menu Follow the procedure below to open the manual from the Start menu O On the Start menu point to All Programs point to Product Name and then click Manual Name The manual opens 9 Note O The menu options may appear differently depending on the options cho sen during installation Opening from the CD ROM Follow the procedure below to open the manual from the CD ROM insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive If you are using a computer running a Macintosh operating system open Manuals htm from the CD ROM root directory 2 Select a language for the interface and a product and then click OK E Click Read HTML manuals
48. for tray 2 Pull tray 2 and then pull it out with both hands BXG048 Place the tray on a flat surface 2 Pinch the clips on the side paper guide and then slide it to match the paper size BXG032 E Pinch the clip on the end paper guide and slide itinward to match the paper size BXG105 50 Loading Paper BXG106 When loading custom size paper position the paper guide slightly wider than the actual paper size 4 Load the new paper stack print side down Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit marked inside the tray BXG036 Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the projection on the side paper guides BSP065S 91 Paper and Other Media B Check there are no gaps between the paper and the paper guide both side and end paper guides BXG109 4 6 Carefully push tray 2 straight into the printer BXG049 S Note O The remaining paper indicator on the left front side of the paper tray shows approximately how much paper is remaining 52 Loading Paper Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray Elmportant O Set the size and direction of the loaded paper using Smart Organizing Moni tor or the printer driver Make sure the settings do not conflict Otherwise the paper may jam or the print quality may be affected O Load paper with the print side up and in the short edge feed direction O If paper is curled straigh
49. fully in Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place BXG060 9 Using both hands carefully push up the front cover until it closes BXG061 Note O If paper is jammed in tray 2 but is difficult to locate pull out tray 2 to remove it After removing the paper carefully push tray 2 all the way back inside the printer O When closing the front cover push the upper area of the cover firmly After closing the cover check that the error is cleared 87 88 Removing Misfed Paper Removing Jammed Paper from the Bypass Tray Use the following procedure to remove paper that has become jammed after being fed in from the bypass tray A CAUTION The inside of this machine becomes very hot Do not touch parts labelled A indicating a hot surface O If paper is jammed in the bypass tray input area remove the jammed paper carefully BXG068 2 Close the bypass tray E Push the side button to open the front cover and then carefully lower it BXG057 When Paper is Jammed 4 Carefully pull out the print cartridge horizontally holding its center BXG058 e Do not shake the removed print cartridge Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak e Place the print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace B Lifting the guide plate remove the jammed paper carefully BXG067 G Slide the print cartridge in horizontally
50. installing the printer driver under Windows XP For details see Windows Help O On the Start menu click Control Panel 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware and then click your computer s Printers and Faxes folder E click Add a printer The Add Printer Wizard appears O click Next gt 5 Click Network printer or A network printer or printer attached to another computer and then click Next gt g Select Browse for a printer and then click Next gt 7 Double click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the Shared printers window g Select this printer from the list of the shared printers and then click Next gt g Select whether or not to use this printer as the default printer and then click Next gt O Click Finish 15 16 Preparing for Printing Installing the Printer Driver Using USB This section explains how to install the printer drivers using USB The printer drivers can be installed from the CD ROM provided with this printer Installing the PCL Printer Driver Elmportant O To install this printer driver you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission Log on as an Administrators group member 1 Quit all applications currently running 2 Check the following e The printer s USB cable is disconnected e The printer s main power switch is turned to off E Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive The installer starts 4 Se
51. la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada e Properly shielded cables must be used for connections to host computer and or peripheral in order to meet FCC emission limits Copyright 2009 EN USD M012 8606 M0128606 e SN dl Notes for Users These notes provide additional information operating manuals on using this product and errata for the description in the Topic Correction Hardware Guide Connecting the Printer gt Network Connection Software Installation Guide for Network Connection 1 Printing a Test Page The following procedure is required after Step I in the Hardware Guide and before Step 1 in the Software Installation Guide for Network Connection After performing this procedure proceed to the next step of each manual Users in the EU Z caution H Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to a host computer and or peripheral in order to meet emission limits Users in the USA CAUTION Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to host computer and or peripheral in order to meet FCC emission limits All Users A A ferrite core for the Ethernet interface cable is supplied with this machine Make a loop in the cable about 5 cm 2 inch from the machine end of the cable Attach the ferrite core B Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port that is
52. located on the rear side of the printer Connect the cable end with the ferrite core to the printer C Connect the other end of the cable to the network for example using a hub exam Hardware Guide Paper and Other Media gt Recommendations gt Loading Paper Paper When you have loaded paper in a paper source tray always set the paper type and size for the tray using Smart Organizing Monitor or Web Image Monitor If the printer and printer driver settings do not match print results might not be as expected Hardware Guide Paper and Other Media gt Loading Paper gt Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray gt Loading envelopes Envelopes whose flaps are open must be printed with the flaps open and envelopes whose flaps are closed must be printed with the flaps closed Before loading envelopes make sure they are as flat as possible Hardware Guide Appendix gt Specifications gt Main Unit Safety Information Laws and Regulations gt Laser Safety This product complies with the following safety standards This machine complies with the requirements of IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 for class 1 laser product Software Guide Preparing for Printing gt Making Option Settings for the Printer gt If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled When Enable bidirectional support is not selected Smart Organizing Monitor cannot be used Select Enable bidirectional support to use the software Softwar
53. m Thick Paper 1 100 130 g m Plain Paper Recycled Color Preprinted Prepunched Letterhead 43 44 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Bypass Tray Item Description Paper Size Select the paper size for the bypass tray from the following A4 B5 JIS A5 B6 S A6 Legal Letter Half Letter S Executive 16K Com 10 Monarch C5 Env C6 Env DL Env Custom Paper Type Select the paper type for the bypass tray from the following Thin Paper 52 64g m Thick Paper 1 100 130g m Thick Paper 2 131 162g m Plain Paper Recycled Color Preprinted Prepunched Letterhead Bond Paper Cardstock Label Paper Envelope OHP Tray Priority Item Description Tray Priority Select the tray that the printer checks first for paper that matches the print job from tray 1 tray 2 or bypass tray 9 Note O The information about tray 2 appears only when it is installed Using Web Image Monitor Configuring the Network Settings Click Network Settings to display the page for configuring the network settings This page contains six tabs Network Status Network Application DNS Alert Mes sages SNMP and SMTP Checking the Network Status Click the Network Status tab on the network settings page to display the network information lt General Status Item Description Link Status Shows the type and speed of t
54. need to perform this procedure Proceed to p 83 Setting Up the PPD File and add the printer O Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable and then turn the printer s power switch to on 2 Start Smart Organizing Monitor from the Applications folder The Printer Driver Selection dialog box appears E In the Printer Driver Selection dialog box select this printer and then click OK Smart Organizing Monitor appears 4 On the User Tools tab click IP Address 5 In IP Address enter the IP address you want to set for the printer The MAC address is displayed automatically Specifying the Printer Setting Up the PPD File O Start Printer Setup Utility Under Mac OS X 10 5 start System Preferences and click Print amp FAX Under Mac OS X 10 3 click Print amp FAX in System Preferences and then click Set Up Printers Under Mac OS X 10 2 8 start Print Center 2 Click Add or button e Mac OS X 10 5 Click Default If the printer name is not displayed select the icon that cor responds to your network environment e Mac OS X 10 4 Click More Printers Then select the zone from the second pop up menu e Mac OS X 10 3 or lower Click Rendezvous on the first pop up menu E Select the printer and then select its manufacturer from the Print Using pop up menu Under Mac OS X 10 5 select the printer you are using from the Printer Name list Under Mac OS X
55. operating system The following driver is included on the CD ROM provided with this printer PCL 6 printer driver This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer via a printer language The following operating system is supported e Windows 2000 XP Vista and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 lt PostScript 3 Printer Drivers and PPD files PostScript 3 printer driver and the PPD files are included on the CD ROM provided with this printer PostScript 3 printer driver allow the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions The following operating system is supported e Windows 2000 XP Vista Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 and Mac OS X 10 2 8 or later Note O The PostScript 3 printer driver and PPD files are included on the CD ROM labeled Printer Drivers and Utilities 97 98 Appendix PPD files PPD files are included on the CD ROM provided with this printer PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions Smart Organizing Monitor You can use Smart Organizing Monitor to check and configure the printer from a client computer lt File path UTILITY Available functions Smart Organizing Monitor enables you to check the printer settings as well as configuring them from your client computer P Reference For information about using Smart Organizing Monitor s
56. plaatsvindt bij de eerste set dan wordt Sorteren geannuleerd Verwijzing Raadpleeg voor meer informatie over de afdrukmethode de Help functie van het stuurprogramma 14 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 15 of 32 ll Merknader for brukere Disse merknadene gir tilleggsinformasjon om bruk av dette produktet og rettelser i brukerveiledningene Programvareinstallasjonsveiledning for nettverkstilkobling 1 Skrive ut n testside Emne Rettelse Maskinvareveiledning Fremgangsm ten nedenfor m f lges etter trim 1 i Koble til skriveren gt Nettverkstilkobling Maskinvareveiledning og f r trinn 1 i Programvareinstallasjonsveiledning for nettverkstilkobling Etter at du har gjennomf rt disse instruksjonene fortsetter du til neste trinn i veiledningene Brukere i EU FORSIKTIG Skjermede og jordede kabler og koblinger m brukes for tilkoblinger til en vertsdatamaskin og eller ekstern for overholde utslippsgrensene Brukere i USA IN FORSIKTIG Skjermede og jordede kabler og koblinger m brukes for tilkoblinger til en vertsdatamaskin og eller ekstern for overholde FCC utslippsgrensene Alle brukere A En ferrittkjerne for Ethernet kabelen leveres med maskinen Lag en sl yfe p kabelen ca 5 cm 2 tommer O fra maskinenden av kabelen Koble til ferrittkjernen B Koble Ethernet kabelen til Ethernet porten p baksi
57. plug not the cable When moving the printer after use do not take out any of the toners nor the waste toner bottle to prevent toner spill inside the machine Repack the printer in its original packing materials for transporting iitimportant O Be sure to disconnect all cables from the printer before transporting it O The printer is a precision piece of machinery Be sure to handle it carefully when moving it O If the optional paper feed unit is installed remove it from the printer and then move them separately O Do not grip on the tray area when lifting the printer Moving the printer in a short distance Elmportant O Do not remove the print cartridge when moving the printer 1 Be sure to check the following points e The power switch is turned off e The power cable is unplugged from the wall outlet e The interface cable is unplugged from the printer 2 If tray 2 is installed remove it 95 96 Appendix 3 Lift the printer by using the inset grips on both sides of the printer and then move it horizontally to the place where you want to use it BXG010 4 If you have removed tray 2 reinstall it Note O Be sure to hold the printer level while carrying it To prevent toner from spilling move the printer carefully Moving over a Long Distance If you intend to move the printer over a long distance you must pack it well Empty all the paper trays but do not remove the print car
58. pro s ov p ipojen 1 Tisk testovac str nky N sleduj c postup je nutn po kroku 1 v Hardwarov p ru ce a p ed krokem 1 v Softwarov m pr vodci instalac pro s tov p ipojen Po proveden tohoto postupu pokra ujte k dal mu kroku ka d p ru ky U ivatel v EU ZN V STRAHA Aby bylo dosa eno emisn ch limit mus b t pou ity pro p ipojen k hostitelsk m po ta m a nebo periferi m spr vn st n n a uzemn n kabely a konektory U ivatel v USA V STRAHA Aby bylo dosa eno emisn ch limit FCC mus b t pou ity pro p ipojen k hostitelskym po ta m a nebo periferi m spr vn st n n a uzemn n kabely a konektory V ichni u ivatel A Sou st tohoto za zen je feritov j dro pro kabel rozhran Ethernet Ud lejte v kabelu smy ku asi 5 cm 2 palce od konce kabelu od za zen P ipevn te feritov j dro B P ipojte Ethernetov kabel k Ethernetov mu portu kter je um st n na zadn stran tisk rny P ipojte konec kabelu s feritov m j drem k tisk rn C P ipojte druh konec kabelu k s ti nap klad pomoc hubu Hardwarov p ru ka Pap r a dal m dia gt Doporu en pro pr ci s pap rem gt Vkl d n pap ru Pokud jste doplnili pap r ve vstupn m z sobn ku pap ru nastavte v dy typ a form t pap ru pro z sobn k pomoc aplikace Smart Organizing Monitor nebo Web Image Monitor
59. test page To install the printer driver you must first confirm the printer s IP address Make sure the network cable is properly connected to the printer before you print the test page O Turn the printer s power switch to off and then wait a few seconds 2 While pressing down the Job Reset key turn the printer s power switch back to on and then keep the key pressed down until the Alert indicator flashes once E Printing starts when the printer is fully warmed up Printing starts approximately 30 seconds after the Alert Indicator starts blinking Note O Ifthe printer is obtaining its IP address automatically from a DHCP server you do not need to install Smart Organizing Monitor separately Proceed to p 83 Setting Up the PPD File and add the printer O If the printer cannot obtain its IP address from a DHCP server install Smart Organizing Monitor and specify the IP address before adding the printer O You can also use Web Image Monitor to change the IP address obtained from a DHCP server To access Web Image Monitor use the IP address printed on the test page P Reference For details about Web Image Monitor see p 37 Using Web Image Monitor For the installation procedure see p 89 Installing Smart Organizing Moni tor 81 82 Mac OS X Configuration Specifying the printer s IP address Elmportant O If the printer is obtaining its IP address automatically from a DHCP server you do not
60. the paper and close the bypass tray 10 Push the side button to open the front cover and then carefully lower it BXG057 11 Carefully pull out the print cartridge horizontally holding its center BXG058 Do not shake the removed print cartridge Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak e Place the print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace 93 Removing Misfed Paper 12 Lifting the guide plate remove the jammed paper carefully BXG067 E Slide the print cartridge in horizontally When the cartridge can go no fur ther raise it slightly and push it fully in Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place BXG060 E 14 Using both hands carefully push up the front cover until it closes BXG061 9 Note O When closing the covers push the covers firmly After closing the covers check that the error is cleared 94 Gi FT E E E ESE e 9 Appendix Moving and Transporting the Printer A CAUTION The printer weighs approximately 12 kg 26 4 Ib When moving the printer use the inset grips on both sides and lift slowly in pairs The printer will break or cause injury if dropped Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine While moving the machine you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the machine When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet always pull the
61. the procedure below to create configuration backup files 1 Select the radio button for the type of data you wish to back up 2 Enter the administrator password if required E click ok 4 Click Save in the confirmation dialog box 5 Navigate to the location to save the backup file g Specify a name for the file and click Save Using Web Image Monitor Restoring the Printer s Settings from a Backup File Click the Restore Settings tab on the administrator settings page to restore the printer s settings from a previously created backup file Elmportant O When the printer is returned from repair it is important that you restore the printer s settings from the backup files The printer s settings are returned to the default after repair mos A Meto Sema ir e seine os Restore Settings Item Description Select file to restore Enter the file path and name of the file to restore or click Browse to select the file Follow the procedure below to restore configuration backup files O Click Browse 2 Navigate to the directory containing the backup file to restore E select the backup file and click Open 4 Enter the administrator password if required B click ok 9 Note O If the setting are not restored successfully an error message appears Try again to restore the file completely 55 56 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Help Source File Setting Click
62. under the machine Elmportant O Do not use chemical cleaner or organic solvent such as thinner or benzine O Turn off the power 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Remove all the cables from the printer E Carefully pull Tray 1 and then pull out with both hands BXG031 Place the tray on a flat surface If there is paper in the tray remove it O Wipe the friction pads with a damp cloth BSP137S 66 Cleaning the Friction Pad and the Paper Feed Roller B Wipe the rubber part of the roller with a soft damp cloth After that wipe it with a dry cloth to remove the moisture BXG064 G Reload the removed paper into the tray and then push the tray carefully into the printer until it clicks into place BXG040 7 Insert the plug of the power cord into the wall socket securely Connect all the interface cables that were removed 8 Turn on the power Note O If jams or multi sheet feeds occur after cleaning the friction pad contact your sales or service representative O If the optional tray 2 is installed clean its friction pads and paper feed roller in the same way as you did for tray 1 67 68 Cleaning the Printer ES e a 7 Troubleshooting Error amp Status Messages on Smart Organizing Monitor This section explains what the messages that appear on the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box mean and what to do when a particular message appears
63. used toner containers in accordance with local regulations Do not store toner used toner or toner containers in a place with an open flame The toner might ignite and cause burns of a fire A CAUTION Keep toner used or unused and toner containers out of reach of children Iftoner or used toner is inhaled gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air environment Consult a doctor if necessary Iftoner or used toner gets into your eyes flush thoroughly with eyewash or water Consult a doctor if necessary Iftoner or used toner is swallowed dilute by drinking a large amount of wa ter Consult a doctor if necessary The printer weighs approximately 12 kg 26 4 Ib When moving the ma chine use the inset grips on both sides and lift slowly The machine will break or cause injury if dropped kimportant O Removed tape is dirty Be careful not to let it touch your hands or clothes O Leave the tape holding the paper feed tray and cover in place while moving the printer O Lower the printer slowly and carefully to prevent trapping your hands O Do not grip on the tray area when lifting the printer O Do not allow paper clips staples or other small metallic objects to fall inside the printer O Keep the uncovered print cartridge away from direct sunlight O Do not touch the print cartridge s photo conductor BSP024S Installing the Printer 1 Take out the prin
64. 0 Series gt Smart Organizing Monitor for SP 3400 Series Status lt If you installed Smart Organizing Monitor with the printer driver In the printing preferences dialog box click Smart Organizing Monitor Or Accessories Advanced Options or Paper Size Settings tab in the printer s properties dialog box click Smart Organizing Monitor Displaying the Printer Status In the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box you can check the status of monitored printers The printer status is displayed using graphics and comments 9 Note O If Smart Organizing Monitor is monitoring multiple printers the Printer Driver Selection dialog box appears Select the printer driver used by the target printer and then click OK To check the status of a network printer click Search Network Printer Printer Driver Selection Please select a printer driver IP 2000000000 Product Name Search Network Printer Using Smart Organizing Monitor User Guide _ Search Network Printer Status 50 100 o ya Remaining Level 5 1 Printer graphic If an input tray error occurs A appears This identifies the tray where the error oc curred The problem tray is outlined in red 2 Comments Displays current printer status and instructions for resolving problems 3 User Guide button Click to display error related Help To use this function install the manual from the C
65. 003 2003 R2 to change printer properties in the Printer folder you need Printer Management access authentication under Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 Full Control access authentication Log on to the file server as an Administrator group O Open the Printers and Faxes window from the Start menu The Printers and Faxes window appears Under Windows 2000 Vista or Windows Server 2008 the Printers window appears 2 Click the icon of this printer On the File menu click Properties The printer properties appears 6 On the Sharing tab click Share this Printer 4 To share this printer with users using a different version of Windows click Additional Drivers If you have installed an alternative driver by selecting Share this Printer during the printer driver installation this step can be ignored 5 On the Advanced tab click the Printing Defaults button Specify the default values for the printer driver that will be distributed to client computers and then click OK G Click OK and then close the printer properties 73 74 Using a Print Server gt _o__ A AAA AS 6 Special Operations under Windows Printing Files Directly from Windows You can print files directly using Windows commands For example you can print PS files for PS3 You can print files directly using lpr or ftp command Setup Follow the procedure below to make network environment settings 1 Enabl
66. 16 mm 3 54 to 8 50 inches in width 140 to 356 mm 5 51 to 14 02 inches in length EH Paper output capacity Standard 125 sheets 80 g m 20 lb Paper input capacity e Tray 1 250 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib e Tray 2 option 250 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib e Bypass tray 50 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib 99 100 Appendix Paper weight e Tray 1 52 to 162 g m 13 8 to 43 0 lb e Tray 2 option 60 to 105 g m 16 0 to 28 0 Ib e Bypass tray 52 to 162 g m 13 8 to 43 0 lb Memory 64 MB Power source 120V 120 V 60 Hz 10 A or more when fully equipped 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 5 A or more when fully equipped lt Power consumption e Maximum power consumption 120V 850 W 220 240V 880 W e Energy Saver mode 1 70 W or less e Energy Saver mode 2 5 W or less Dimensions Width x Depth x Height 370 x 392 x 262 mm 14 6 x 15 5 x 10 41 inches Tf tray 2 is installed the height increases by 89 mm 3 5 inches lt Weight printer body with consumables Approximately 12 kg 26 4 lb lt Printing speed 600 dpi 28 pages per minute A4 30 pages per minute Letter Resolution 600 dpi Maximum 1200 x 600 dpi First print speed 8 seconds or less A4 Letter 600 x 600 dpi Interface e Ethernet LOBASE T 100BASE TX e USB 2 0 Specifications Printer language PCL 6 PostScript 3 Fonts 80 fonts Network protocol TCP IP IPP P
67. 250 Thin paper B5 JIS 13 8 to 43 0 Ib 80 g m 20 lb Thick paper 1 A5 Thick paper 2 B6 S Recycled paper A6 Color paper Legal 81 2 x 14 Preprinted paper Letter 81 2 x 11 Prepunched paper Half Letter S 5 1 2 x 81 2 Teens Executive 71 4 x 10 2 Bond paper 8 x13 Cardstock 81 2 x 13 Label paper Folio 81 4 x 13 16K 195 x 267 mm Custom size 100 to 216 mm in width 148 to 356 mm in length 3 94 to 8 50 inches in width 5 83 to 14 02 inches in length Tray 2 option Type Size Weight Capacity Plain paper A4 60 to 105 g m 250 Thin paper B5 JIS 16 0 to 28 0 Ib 80 g m 20 Ib Thick paper 1 A5 Recycled paper Legal 81 2 x 14 Color paper Letter 81 2 x 11 Preprinted paper Half Letter S 51 2 x 81 2 Prepunched paper Letterhead 3 32 Paper and Other Media Bypass tray OHP transparencies Envelope Monarch 37 g x 71 2 C5 Env 162 x 229 mm C6 Env 114 x 162 mm DL Env 110 x 220 mm Custom size 90 to 216 mm in width 140 to 356 mm in length 3 54 to 8 50 inches in width 5 51 to 14 02 inches in length Type Size Weight Capacity Plain paper A4 52 to 162 g m 50 Thin paper B5 JIS 13 8 to 43 0 Ib 80 g m 20 Ib Thick paper 1 AS Thick paper 2 B6 S Recycled paper A6 Color paper Legal 81 2 x 14 Preprinted paper Letter 81 2 x 11 Prepunched paper Half Letter S 5 1 2 x 81 2 a Executive 7 4 x 101 32
68. 4 210 x 297 mm B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm A5 148 x 210 mm 8 1 2 x 14 81 2x11 51 2x 81 2 e Paper Type You can specify the paper type for tray 2 The following paper types are available Thin Paper Thick Paper 1 Plain Paper 1 Recycled Paper Color Paper Preprinted Paper Prepunched Paper Letterhead 63 64 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Tray Priority Select the priority tray from the Default Tray list when the optional paper feed unit is attached to the printer Bypass Tray e Paper Size The following sizes are available A4 210 x 297 mm B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm A5 148 x 210 mm B6 JIS 128 x 182 mm A6 105 x 148 mm 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 51 2x81 2 71 4x 10 1 2 16K 41 8x91 2 37 8x71 2 C5 Env C6 Env DL Env Custom Paper Size e Paper Type The following paper types are available Thin Paper Thick Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Plain Paper 1 Recycled Paper Color Paper Preprinted Paper Prepunched Paper Letterhead Bond Paper Cardstock Labels Envelope OHP e Custom Paper Size You can make the custom paper size settings when Custom Paper Size is selected e Unit Specify the unit of measurement in mm or inch e Horizontal Specify the horizontal width between 90 and 216 mm 3 54 and 8 50 inch e Vertical Specify the vertical length between 140 and 356 mm 5 51 and 14 02 inch 9 Note O The paper settings are not available for the bypass tray O Tray 2 is available only when t
69. 5 start System Preferences and click Print amp FAX Under Mac OS X 10 3 click Print amp FAX in System Preferences and then click Set Up Printers Under Mac OS X 10 2 8 start Print Center E click Ada or the button Mac OS X 10 5 Click Default lt Mac OS X 10 4 Click a printer that has USB indicated in the Connection column Mac OS X 10 3 or lower Click USB on the pop up menu The comected printer appears 4 Select the printer and then select its manufacturer from the Print Using pop up menu Under Mac OS X 10 5 select the printer you are using from the Printer Name list and kind of USB Under Mac OS X 10 3 or lower select the printer you are using from the Printer Model pop up menu 5 Select the connected printer from the list of printer models and then click Add A Quit Printer Setup Utility Note O USB2 0 can be used only with Mac OS X 10 3 3 or higher Specifying the Printer Using TCP IP To connect the printer via TCP IP you must complete the following four steps Print the test page Install Smart Organizing Monitor if necessary Q Specify the printer s IP address if necessary Add the printer using Printer Setup Utility Note O If the printer is obtaining its IP address automatically from a DHCP serv er you do not need to perform 2 Install Smart Organizing Monitor and 3 Specify the printer s IP address Printing a
70. 75 Print server 15 73 PS Config Font Page 61 91 R Replaceable parts 40 Restore settings 55 S Shared printer 15 Smart Organizing Monitor 57 89 97 displaying 58 89 file path 98 install 57 89 Mac OS X 89 Maintenance tab 64 95 Network 1 2 3 tab Mac 95 Network 1 2 3 tab Windows 65 paper settings 63 93 System tab 65 95 SMTP 51 65 95 SMTP authentication 67 SNMP 49 65 68 95 Software and utilities 97 Specifying the printer 80 Standard TCP IP 5 Status tab 60 90 T TCP IP 65 81 95 Toner 40 Top Page 39 Tray priority 43 Troubleshooting USB 21 Type 1 model 3 Type 2 model 3 U UDP 68 USB 80 User Tools tab 60 61 90 91 Printer Configuration 62 92 W Watermark 35 Web Image Monitor 37 Top Page 39 Web Image Monitor Help 56 Windows network printer 6 15 Windows printing port 5 Windows Server 2008 printer properties 29 Windows Terminal Service 101 limitations 102 supported printer drivers 101 Windows Vista printer properties 29 en GD EN GD M012 8604 Trademarks Microsoft Windows Windows Server and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat Acrobat Reader PageMaker PostScript and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Apple Macintosh Mac OS and Safari are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and ot
71. 8 1 2 x 11 51 2x81 2 71 4x 10 1 2 8 x 13 81 2 x 13 8 1 4 x 13 16K Custom Paper Size e Paper Type The following paper types are available Thin Paper Thick Paper 1 Plain Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Recycled Paper Color Paper Preprinted Paper Prepunched Paper Letterhead Bond Paper Cardstock Labels e Custom Paper Size You can make the custom paper size settings when Custom Paper Size is selected e Unit Specify the unit of measurement in mm or inch e Horizontal Specify the horizontal width between 100 and 216 mm 3 94 and 8 50 inch e Vertical Specify the vertical length between 148 and 356 mm 5 83 and 14 02 inch Tray 2 e Paper Size The following sizes are available A4 210 x 297 mm B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm A5 148 x 210 mm 8 1 2 x 14 81 2x11 51 2x81 2 e Paper Type The following paper types are available Thin Paper Plain Paper 1 Thick Paper 1 Recycled Paper Color Paper Preprinted Paper Prepunched Paper Letterhead Tray Priority Select the priority tray from the Default Tray list when the optional paper feed unit is attached to the printer 93 Mac OS X Configuration Bypass Tray e Paper Size The following sizes are available A4 210 x 297 mm B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm A5 148 x 210 mm B6 JIS 128 x 182 mm A6 105 x 148 mm 81 2 x 14 8 1 2 x11 51 2x81 2 71 4x101 2 16K 41 8x91 2 37 8x71 2 C5 Env C6 Env DL Env Custom Paper Size e Paper Type The followi
72. AN environment over dial up lines such as ISDN printing may not be possible or errors may occur depending on data transfer rates Citrix Presentation Server Citrix XenApp Printer driver replication Using Printer driver replication you can distribute printer drivers across all servers in a server farm We strongly recommend testing this function in your network environment before using it for your work e If the printer drivers are not properly copied install them directly onto each server INDEX 100 BASE TX 5 10 BASE T 5 A Access code 62 92 Adjusting registrations 64 95 Administrator password 53 Administrator settings 53 Adobe PageMaker 100 Alert message 48 Auto Duplex 3 AutoNet 99 Auto Run 22 Backup settings 54 Bidirectional communication 23 24 conditions 23 C Canceling a job control panel 31 32 Windows 32 CD ROM 97 Citrix Presentation Server Citrix XenApp 101 limitations 102 operating environment 101 Collate 33 Command ftp 75 lpr 75 Configuration page 52 69 Smart Organizing Monitor 61 91 Connection method 5 local connection 5 6 network connection 5 Counter 41 Cover 34 Custom Paper Size 63 93 D Default settings 53 DHCP server 99 Displaying the printer status Smart Organizing Monitor 58 90 Display Smart Organizing Monitor automatically 31 DNS setting 47 E E mail 51 E Mail notification 66 Ethernet 5 F Form Feed 31 H Help Sour
73. AUCI N Hay que utilizar conectores y cables debidamente apantallados y conectados a tierra para las conexiones con el ordenador host y o perif ricos para cumplir los l mites de emisiones FCC Todos los usuarios A Se proporciona un n cleo de ferrita para el cable de interfaz Ethernet con esta m quina Haga un bucle con el cable de unos 5 cm 2 pulgadas O desde el extremo de la m quina del cable Coloque el n cleo de ferrita B Conecte el cable Ethernet al puerto Ethernet situado en la parte posterior de la impresora Conecte el extremo del cable con n cleo de ferrita a la impresora C Conecte el otro extremo del cable a la red por ejemplo mediante un hub axroz Manual de hardware Papel y otros soportes gt Recomendaciones acerca del papel gt Carga del papel Si ha cargado papel en una bandeja fuente de papel establezca siempre el tipo y tamafio del papel para la bandeja con Smart Organizing Monitor o Web Image Monitor Si la configuraci n de la impresora y del driver de impresora no coinciden puede que los resultados de impresi n no sean los deseados Manual de hardware Papel y otros soportes gt Carga del papel gt Carga de papel en la bandeja bypass gt Carga de sobres Al imprimir en sobres c rguelos como se proporcionan en el paquete ya sea con las tapas abiertas o cerradas Antes de cargar sobres aseg rese de que est n lo m s plano posible Manual de hardware Ap ndi
74. Cleaning the Printer Troubleshooting Removing Misfed Paper Appendix o 00 9 3 e 8 es 9 E Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference For safe and correct use be sure to read Safety Information before using the machine Introduction This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine For your safety and benefit read this manual carefully before using the machine Keep this manual in a handy place for quick reference Important Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice In no event will the company be li able for direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper ating the machine Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law bank notes revenue stamps bonds stock certificates bank drafts checks passports driver s licenses The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive We assume no responsibility for its completeness or accuracy If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing cer tain items consult with your legal advisor Notes Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine Certain options might not be available in some countries For details please
75. D ROM For the manual in stallation procedure see Hardware Guide 4 Search Network Printer button Click to select a network printer BXG503 5 Status tab Displays the status of the items such as toner levels and paper level 6 Job Log tab Displays the information related to print jobs 7 User Tools tab Prints the Configuration Page PCL Con figuration Font Page and PS Configura tion Font Page The Printer Configuration dialog box can be opened from this tab 59 60 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Displaying the Printer Information The lower half of the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box contains the follow ing three tabs Status Job Log and User Tools You can use these tabs to dis play information about a monitored printer such as its status job history and configuration Displaying the printer status The left side of the Status tab shows the printer name and tree Click an item in the tree to display information relating to it Print Cartridge Displays the following messages to indicate remaining toner levels Remaining Level 1 to 5 Almost Empty and Empty Graphics also indicate remaining toner levels lt Input Tray You can check the following information about the input trays e Input Tray Displays the installed input trays e Status Displays the input tray status Out of Paper or Status OK e Paper Size Displays the size of th
76. Hardwarevejledning Papir og andre medier gt Il gning af papir gt Il gning af papir i bypassbakken gt Ilegning af kuverter N r du skal udskrive p kuverter skal de il gges i deres oprindelige form med ben eller lukket flap S rg for at kuverterne er s flade som muligt f r du il gger dem Hardwarevejledning Appendiks gt Specifikationer gt Hovedenhed Sikkerhedsoplysninger Love og bestemmelser gt Lasersikkerhed Produktet overholder f lgende sikkerhedsstandarder Maskinen er i overensstemmelse med IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 for klasse 1 laserprodukter Andre udskrivningsfunktioner gt Hvis der opst r fejl med specificeret papirst rrelse og type Softwarevejledning Smart Organizing Monitor kan ikke bruges hvis Aktiver Forberedelse til udskrivning gt Udf rsel af underst ttelse af torettede sprog ikke er valgt For at kunne bruge printerindstillinger gt Hvis softwaren skal du v lge Aktiver underst ttelse af torettede sprog tovejskommunikation er deaktiveret Softwarevejledning N r der opst r en fejl i forbindelse med udskrivning kan indstillingerne ikke ndres med Smart Organizing Monitor Softwarevejledning Overv gning og konfiguration af printeren gt Sadan anvender man Web Image Monitor gt Tjekker systemoplysninger gt Tjekker t lleroplysninger Viser det samlede antal ark der er udskrevet p begge sider Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Sa
77. Hz 5 A or more lt Stromversorgung 120 V 60 Hz 10 A oder mehr 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 5 A oder mehr Source d alimentation 120 V 60 Hz 10 A ou plus 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 5 A ou plus Alimentazione exon e 120 V 60 Hz 10 Ao maggiore 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 5 A o maggiore Fuente de alimentaci n e 120 V 60 Hz 10 Ao m s e 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 5 Ao m s Voeding 120 V 60 Hz 10 A of meer 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 5 A of meer Fonte de alimenta o 120 V 60 Hz 10 A ou mais 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 5 A ou mais or Fonte de alimenta o 120 V 60 Hz 10 A ou mais e 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 5 A ou mais Lees de handleiding zorgvuldig door voordat u het product gebruikt en houd deze bij de hand U kunt dan de handleiding zo nodig altijd raadplegen Lees met het oog op een veilig en juist gebruik van het apparaat ook de Veiligheidsinformatie door voordat u het apparaat gaat gebruiken In deze handleiding wordt de installatieprocedure voor dit apparaat kort beschreven Voor meer informatie over de installatie en andere informatie raadpleeg de Hardwarehandleiding op de cd rom Leia o presente manual com aten o antes de utilizar este produto e guarde o para futura refer ncia Para uma utiliza o correcta e em seguran a leia as Informa es de Seguran a antes de utilizar o equipamento O presente manual descreve brevemente o procedimento para instalar este equipamento
78. Merom3oBanme Smart Organizing Monitor gt OtoOpaxeHue COCTOAHHA IIPUHTEPA IIpu neyaru uepez USB coenuHeune HH opManmna O NpHHTepe no Smart Organizing Monitor MOKET OOHOBNATECA HEKOppeKTHO PyKOBOJICTBO 110 nporpammHoMy 06ecneyennro CrermarsHbie orepammm B Windows gt Degar patio mpamo 13 Windows gt Komannsi negara gt lpr Cregyroumi CHHTAKCHC lpr KoMaH IbI ABJIACTCA MPABHJIBHBIM c gt lpr S IP axpec npuutepa P ums npumrepa o 1 oyre uma pa a c gt lpr S uma y3na npunrepa P ums mpuutepa o 1 oyrp uma pala PykOBOJICTBO No nporpammHoMy 06ecreyennro CrermarHbIe orepanmm B Windows gt Ilesarb patios mpamo m3 Windows gt Komannsi neuata gt ftp CreAyroma CHHTAKCHC lpr kKoOMaHABI ABJIACTCA MPABHJIBHBIM ftp gt put nyrb nma paira Ilapametp ftp gt mput nyTb uma pala nyTb uma paira PykO0BO JICTBO 110 nporpammHoMy 06ecresennro CrermarsHbIe orrepanma B Windows gt egar palio mpamo 13 Windows gt KomaHnnsi negara gt ftp Tpu nepenaun NaHHBIX no ftp 06a mapamerpa User MONB30BATeNB n Password maponb npnkpenneHsI x napamerpy sysadmin ua Hepenayn MaHHBIX NO ftp BBENHTE napamerp sysadmin o6opynoBaHma gt YVcTaHoBka TMpHHTepa gt Pacrrakoska Kparkoe pyKOBO ICTBO IO yCTAHOBKE 2 Pacr ako ka Tema Oum6ka WcnpasneHo PykoBoxcTBo no annaparHomy 06ecneuennio 5 BbimbTe ymakoBouHbili MarepHar 5 BbiHbTe yIlaKkoBOUHbI MarepHast YcraHoBka IpHHTepa M HAOMOJNHHTENBHOTO rI
79. OHA Pp unitaria 101 Operating ENVIO Mentira dn nn 101 Supported Printer Drives neniani aae a a eia A 101 LIMITADOS iaia ara 102 INDEX iaia ati 103 Manuals for This Printer For particular functions see the relevant parts of the manual Safety Information Provides information on safe usage of this printer To avoid injury and pre vent damage to the printer be sure to read this Quick Installation Guide Contains procedures for removing the printer from its box and connecting it to a computer Hardware Guide Contains information about paper and procedures such as installing options replacing consumables responding to error messages and resolving jams lt Software Guide This manual Contains procedures for using this printer in a network environment and uti lizing the software How to Read This Manual Symbols This manual uses the following symbols ditimportant Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine and explanations of likely causes of paper misfeeds damage to originals or loss of data Be sure to read these explanations 9 Note Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine s functions and instruc tions on resolving user errors P Reference This symbol is located at the end of sections It indicates where you can find fur ther relevant information Indicates the names of keys and buttons Indicates the names of keys on the printer s control panel Pr
80. On the Printer tab you can set conditions for printing In the PCL area you can specify the conditions such as Orientation and font settings 65 66 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Printer Status Notification by E Mail Whenever a toner cartridge becomes empty or paper is jammed an e mail alert is issued to the registered addresses to notify the printer status Elmportant O This function is available only if you are using this printer in a network environment O Depending on your e mail application a phishing warning might appear af ter you receive an e mail message To prevent phishing warnings appearing after you receive e mail from a specified sender you must add the sender to your e mail application s exclusion list For details about how to do this refer to your e mail application s Help For this notification you can make the e mail notification settings You can be notified of the following events e Paper Jam e Print Cartridge Empty e Service Required e Print Cartridge Near Empty e No Paper e Cover Open Also you can see the information of the printer such as printer name serial number and total counter O Open a Web browser and then enter http printer s address in the address bar Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears 2 In the menu area click Network Settings E Click the Alert Messages tab 4 In Display Name enter the sender s name to be used in the automa
81. Para mais informa es acerca das instala es e outras informa es consulte o Guia de Hardware no CD ROM BXG101 BXG205 Leia o presente manual com aten o antes de utilizar este produto e guarde o para futura refer ncia Para uma utiliza o correta e segura leia a Informa o de seguran a antes de utilizar o equipamento O presente manual descreve brevemente o procedimento para instalar este equipamento Para mais informa es sobre as instala es e outras informa es consulte o Guia de Hardware no CD ROM BXG102 Para informa es acerca de como ligar e instalar o controlador da impressora para liga o rede consulte o Guia de Instala o de Software para Liga o de Rede Para informa es acerca de como ligar e Loading Paper Connection Installing the Software Einlegen von Papier Verbindung Installieren der Software Chargement du papier Connexion Installation du logiciel instalar o controlador da impressora para Caricamento della carta Collegamento Installazione del software liga o local consulte o Guia de Software Carga del papel Conexi n Instalaci n del software v I IO I iii i N 7 o driver da impressora para conex o de rede Papier plaatsen Aansluiten De software installeren consulia Guia de Instala o de Sofware para Colocar papel Li Ligar Instalar o software Conex o de Rede Colocar papel Conectar In
82. Quick Installation Guide Guida di installazione rapida Guia de Instala o R pida 000000032 Kurzanleitung zur Installation Guia de Instalaci n R pida Guia de Instala o R pida e 0n0 000 SP 3400N SP 3410DN Guide d installation rapide Verkorte Installatiehandleiding 00000000 Place to Install Unpacking i M0128609 Read this manual carefully before you use the product and keep it handy for future reference Installationsort E Auspacken For safe and correct use please be sure to read the Safety Information before using the machine Emplacement de installation Retrait del em ballage This manual briefly describes the procedure for installing this machine Posizione di installazione Disimballaggio For more details about installation and other information see Hardware Guide in the CD ROM Lugar de instalaci n Desembalaje Lesen Sie das Handbuch vor der Verwendung dieses Ger ts sorgfaltig durch Bewahren Sie das Plaatsen voor de installatie Verpakking verwijderen Handbuch sicher auf Local de instala o Desembalar Vor der Verwendung des Ger ts sollten Sie die Sicherheitshinweise lesen um eine sichere und Local de instala o Desembalar korrekte Verwendung zu gew hrleisten Dieses Handbuch bietet eine Kurzbeschreibung des Vorgangs der Ger teinstallation Weitere Informationen zur Installation und zu weiteren Themen finden Sie in der Hardware Anleitung auf der CD ROM Lisez attentivement ce manuel avant d utilis
83. Rede Aitimportante Utilize cabos Ethernet blindados Os cabos n o blindados criam interfer ncia eletromagn tica que pode causar avarias Guia de Hardware Papel e outros suportes gt Recomenda es de Papel gt Tipos de Papel e de Outros Suportes de Impress o gt Tipos de papel Guia de Hardware Papel e outros suportes gt Colocar papel gt Colocar papel na bandeja de alimenta o manual gt Colocar envelopes Evite utilizar envelopes autocolantes Isto pode provocar disfun es na impressora Guia de Hardware Resolu o de Problemas gt Mensagens de Erro amp Estado no Smart Organizing Monitor Coloque papel na bandeja de papel do formato selecionado e altere a defini o do formato de papel com o Smart Organizing Monitor Guia de Software Outras opera es de impress o gt Agrupar RZ Nota Se a op o Continuar Automaticamente ocorrer no primeiro conjunto a fun o Agrupar ser cancelada Se ocorrer um avan o de p gina no primeiro conjunto a fun o Agrupar ser cancelada Refer ncia Para mais informa es sobre o m todo de impress o consulte a EN GB EN GS DE OD FREB IT ID ES ES NL ND NONO PT PD F I ED cs CD HU ED PL ED RURD P 32 DA DR Copyright 2009 SV GB Printed in China TER MO Ajuda do driver de impressora M0128681 12 8681 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 M0128617 Note to Administrator
84. S AN RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 5 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM e Ha an ZA Handling Power Cords and Power Plugs A WARNING The supplied power cord is for use with this equipment only Do not use with other appliances Doing so may result in fire electric shock or injury The wall outlet shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily accessible Connect the machine to the power source specified in this manual and do not use any other power sources Connect the power cord directly to a wall outlet and do not use an extension cord Power sources not specified in this manual and extension cords are electric shock or fire hazards Power cords that are damaged broken modified trapped under heavy objects pulled hard or bent severely are electric shock and fire hazards Touching the prongs of the power cable s plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and electric shock hazard Plug and unplug the power cable with dry hands or an electric shock could occur AD 4 A CAUTION When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet always pull the plug not the cable Itis dangerous to handle the plug with wet hands Doing this may result in receiving an electric shock Besureto disconnectthe plug from the wall outletand clean the prongs and the area around the prongs at least once a year Allowing dust to build up on the plug consti
85. SB port appears automatically in the Printers window When USB is first used plug and play starts Then the New Hardware Found Device Driver Wizard or Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box ap pears depending on the operating system To disable Auto Run press the left Shift key when inserting the CD ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD ROM The number after USB varies depending on the number of printers connected A message appears if the printer connection fails Check the USB cable is connected and the printer s main power switch is turned to on and then click Retry To stop USB auto detection click Stop Auto detecting The USB port is available only for the printer driver that is installed first To install additional drivers for this printer install them using other ports such as LPT1 Then after the installation change the port settings to the specified USB port 17 Preparing for Printing Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver Windows 2000 Elmportant O To install this printer driver you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission Log on as an Administrators group member If the printer driver has already been installed plug and play is enabled and the icon of the printer connected to the USB portis added to the Printers window If the printer driver is not installed follow the plug and play instructions
86. Systems Incorporated PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Monotype is a registered trademark of Monotype Imaging Inc IPS is a trademark or registered trademark of Zoran Corporation and or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries Apple Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and oth er countries Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights to those marks The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server The product names of Windows XP are as follows Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition The product names of Windows Vista are as follows Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Microsoft Windows Vista Business Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Web Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition The product names of Win
87. Tpoek MapaMeTpoB INIT mpuutepa gt Ecm HeBo3MOXkHO Jia wcronb30BaHHS AMAHHOTO TIO BBI6epure ABYCTOPOHHAA CBA3b OTKJIOYEHA Pa3pennTb ABYCTOPOHHH OOMeH AAHHBIMH PyKoBOJCTBO no nporpammHoMy 06ecreuernro Ilp rmosBieHHH ONMOKH TIeYATH HEBO3MOKHO TIOMCHATb HACTPoHKH C HOMOINBIO Smart Organizing Monitor PyKOBOJICTBO No nporpammHoMy 06ecneysennro MOHHTOPHHT H KoHpurypupoBaHHe IpHHTepa gt MVcromb3osamue rmporpammer Web Image Monitor gt Ilposepka HHpopmaumu o cucreme gt IIposepka HHpopMmanna CYETYHKOB Tloka3bIBaeT o mee KOJMTECTBO JIMCTOB TIPOH3BeeHa C ABYX CTOPOH meyaTb Ha KOTOpbIX 29 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 30 of 32 PyKOBOXCTBO No nporpammHoMy 06ecreyennro MOHHTOPHHT n KoHQHIrypHpoBaHHe npHHTepa gt Mcroxb3oBaHHe rmporpammbr Web Image Monitor gt Hacrpoika mapamerpoB cera gt Hacrpoi xa MapaMeTpoB cereBoro IIPHJIOOKEHHA Homep rmopra 49999 B MEHR BMECTE CO He yka3biBa Te IA Tapamerpa Hactpo ka reyarm no cern 3HayenHe 3HayeHHeM 53550 PykOBOJICTBO No nporpammHoMy 06ecresennro MOHHTOPHHT n kKoHQHIrypHpoBaHHe npHHTepa gt Mcroxb3oBaHHe rmporpammbr Web Image Monitor gt Hactpoiika mapamerpoB cera gt Hacrpoi xa mapamerpos DNS na mapamerpa Bpema oxugaHua DNS cex moxHo 3anaTb unco oT 1 10 999 PykOBOJICTBO No nporpammHoMy 06ecneyennro MOHHTOPHHT n KoHQHIrypHpoBaHHe npHHTepa gt
88. Turning the Power On Follow the procedure below to turn the power on A WARNING Plug and unplug the power cable with dry hands or an electric shock could occur iitimportant I Make sure the power cable is plugged securely into the wall outlet O Turn the power switch off when plugging and unplugging the power plug O Do not turn off the power switch until initializing is completed Doing so results in malfunction 1 Plug in the power cable BXG020 21 Installing the Printer and Options 2 Turn the power switch to On The Ready indicator on the control panel lights up 9 Note O Wait until the Ready indicator turns on O The printer may make a noise while initializing This noise does not indi cate a malfunction O To turn off the power turn the power switch to O Off BXG022 22 Installing the Optional Paper Feed Unit Installing fhe Optional Paper Feed Unit This section describes how to install the optional paper feed unit A WARNING Touching the prongs of the power cable s plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and electric shock hazard A CAUTION The printer weighs approximately 12 kg 26 4 Ib When moving the printer use the inset grips on both sides and lift slowly in pairs The printer will break or cause injury if dropped Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping may cause injury Itis dangerous to ha
89. United States of America Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential in stallation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency ener gy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be deter mined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to cor rect the interference by one more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Caution Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note to users in Canada Note This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada Avertissement Cet appareil num rique de
90. a e Number of paper set in the tray exceeds the limit Con firm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray See p 31 Paper and Other Media e Paper is static Use paper that has been stored properly See p 31 Paper and Other Media e The friction pad or paper feed roller might be dirty Clean the relevant component See p 66 Cleaning the Friction Pad and the Paper Feed Roller e Check that paper was not added while there was still some left in the tray Only add paper when there is none left in the tray e Fan the paper before loading Paper gets wrinkles e Paper is damp Use paper that has been stored properly See p 31 Paper and Other Media e Paper is too thin See p 31 Paper and Other Media e There may be a gap between the front end paper guide and the paper or between the paper guide both side and the paper in the paper tray Make sure there are no gaps See p 41 Loading Paper The printed paper is curled e Load the paper upside down in the paper tray e Pull out the extender of the output tray e Ifthe paper curl is severe take prints from the output tray more frequently e Paper is damp Use paper that has been stored properly See p 31 Paper and Other Media Images are not printed in the right position Q ASH102S Adjust the printing position from Smart Organizing Moni tor See Software Guide
91. a Para mais informa es sobre a defini o de uma senha consulte a Ajuda do Web Image Monitor ou do Smart Organizing Monitor ao 09 10 28 1 mi
92. a extremidade do cabo com o n cleo de ferrite impressora C Ligue a outra extremidade do cabo rede por exemplo usando um hub Guia de Hardware Papel e outros suportes gt Recomenda es de Papel gt Colocar papel Quando tiver colocado papel numa bandeja configure sempre o tipo e o tamanho do papel para a bandeja com o Smart Organizing Monitor ou o Web Image Monitor Se as configura es na impressora e no driver de impress o n o corresponderem os resultados de impress o podem n o sair como esperado Guia de Hardware Papel e outros suportes gt Colocar papel gt Colocar papel na bandeja de alimenta o manual gt Colocar envelopes Envelopes com abas abertas devem ser impressos com as abas abertas e envelopes com abas fechadas devem ser impressos com as abas fechadas Antes de colocar envelopes confirme se est o bem planos Guia de Hardware Anexo gt Especifica es gt Unidade principal Este produto cumpre com as seguintes normas de seguran a Este equipamento atende aos requisitos da norma IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 para produtos a laser de classe 1 Guia de Software Preparar para impress o gt Fazer defini es das op es para a impressora gt Se a comunica o bidirecional for desativada N o poss vel usar o Smart Organizing Monitor quando Ativar suporte bidirecional n o est selecionado Selecione Ativar suporte bidirecional para utilizar o software Gu
93. a impressora Duplo clique em OK e de seguida em Fechar Instalar o controlador da impressora Na caixa de di logo Printer Drivers and Utilities clique no nome do controlador da impressora que pretenda instalar Depois de ler o acordo clique em Aceito o acordo e em seguida clique em Seguinte gt Seleccione a caixa de selec o Procurar impressoras de rede e de seguida clique em Seguinte gt Quando for apresentada a lista de impressoras encontradas clique nesta impressora e depois clique em Seguinte gt Caso seja necess rio fa a duplo clique na impressora para apresentar e configurar as defini es e de seguida clique em Continuar Se aparecer uma mensagem informando que a instala o foi conclu da com sucesso clique em Terminar Nota Se a defini o do endere o IP ou a pesquisa de impressora falhar certifique se de que a impressora est ligada ao mesmo segmento de rede que o PC Portugu s do Brasil O presente manual descreve brevemente o procedimento para instalar o driver da impressora no ambiente de rede Se utilizar esta impressora com o cabo USB consulte o Guia de Software para a instala o do driver da impressora Importante O instalador do driver n o oferece suporte para portugu s do Brasil Para o seguinte procedimento em portugu s brasileiro consulte o Guia de instala o do driver Siga este procedimento se deseja instalar a ve
94. a piscar Verifique o endere o IP da impressora da p gina de teste imprimida Refer ncia Tamb m pode utilizar o Web Image Monitor para alterar o endere o IP obtido do servidor DHCP Para aceder ao Web Image Monitor utilize o endere o IP impresso na p gina de teste Para mais informa es acerca do Web Image Monitor consulte o Guia de Software Instalar o Smart Organizing Monitor Feche todos os programas actualmente em execu o Introduza o CD ROM na unidade de CD ROM Seleccione o idioma da interface e clique em OK Clique em Smart Organizing Monitor Print_M0128614 indd 4 Seleccione uma l ngua para o programa de instala o Smart Organizing Monitor e de seguida clique em Seguinte gt Clique em Seguinte gt Depois de ler o contrato clique em Sim Duplo clique em Seguinte gt Clique em Terminar Especificar o endere o IP da impressora No menu Iniciar em Todos os programas gt Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series gt Estado do Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series para iniciar o Smart Organizing Monitor Nota Num ambiente Windows Vista seleccione Executar como administrador para iniciar o Smart Organizing Monitor Clique em Endere o IP e de seguida introduza o endere o MAC impresso na p gina de teste ex 00 11 22 aa bb cc na caixa Endere o MAC Na caixa Endere o IP introduza o endere o IP que quer definir para
95. abelled A indicating a hot surface The fusing section of this machine might be very hot Caution should be tak en when removing misfed paper Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping it may cause injury Do not pull out the paper tray forcefully If you do the tray might fall and cause an injury dl e La S AN RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 7 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM Handling the Consumables A WARNING Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers Toner dust might ig nite when exposed to an open flame Dispose of used toner containers n accordance with local regulations Do not store toner used toner or toner containers in a place with an open flame The toner might ignite and cause burns of a fire Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame e Keep the polythene materials bags gloves etc supplied with this machine away from babies and small children at all times Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into contact with the mouth or nose A CAUTION Keep toner used or unused and toner containers out of reach of children e Iftoner or used toner is inhaled gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air environment Consulta doctor if necessary Iftoner or used toner gets into your eyes flush immediately with
96. aci n haga clic en Siguiente gt Seleccione la casilla de verificaci n Buscar impresoras en red y despu s haga clic en Siguiente gt Cuando aparezca la lista de impresoras encontradas haga clic en esta impresora y despu s haga clic en Siguiente gt Si fuera necesario haga doble clic en la impresora para visualizar y configurar los ajustes y despu s haga clic en Continuar Si aparece el mensaje de que la instalaci n se complet correctamente haga clic en Finalizar Nota Sila configuraci n de la direcci n IP o la b squeda de impresoras no se puede completar correctamente asegurese de que la impresora est conectada al mismo segmento de red que el PC Nederlands Deze handleiding geeft een korte beschrijving van de installatieprocedure van het printerstuurprogramma binnen de netwerkomgeving Indien u deze printer gebruikt met een USB kabel raadpleeg Softwarehandleiding voor de installatie van het printerstuurprogramma Voor een correct gebruik dient u de Verkorte Installatiehandleiding te lezen en de in de handleiding beschreven instellingen aanbrengen U dient de volgende vier stappen uit te voeren om de printer te gebruiken 1 Een testpagina afdrukken 2 Smart Organizing Monitor installeren indien nodig 3 Het IP adres van de printer specificeren indien nodig 4 Het printerstuurprogramma installeren Opmerking Als de printer zijn IP adres automatisch van een DHCP server verkrijgt hoeft
97. age Monitor gt Sprawdzanie Informacji o systemie gt Sprawdzanie Informacji o liczniku Pokazuje og ln liczb arkuszy wydrukowanych po obu stronach 27 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 28 of 32 Podrecznik oprogramowania Monitorowanie i konfigurowanie drukarki gt Korzystanie z Web Image Monitor gt Konfiguracja ustawie sieciowych gt Konfiguracja ustawien aplikacji sieciowej Nie okreslaj 49999 w edycji do 53550 dla Nr portu w opcji Sieciowe ustawienia drukowania Podrecznik oprogramowania Monitorowanie i konfigurowanie drukarki gt Korzystanie z Web Image Monitor gt Konfiguracja ustawie sieciowych gt Konfiguracja ustawie DNS Liczba pomi dzy 1 a 999 mo e by okre lona dla opcji Oczekiw na DNS w sek Podr cznik oprogramowania Monitorowanie i konfigurowanie drukarki gt U ywanie programu Smart Organizing Monitor gt Wy wietlanie stanu drukarki Gdy drukujesz przez po czenie USB informacja o drukarce w opcji Smart Organizing Monitor mo e nie zosta zaktualizowana poprawnie Podr cznik oprogramowania Szczeg lne operacje w systemie Windows gt Drukowanie plik w bezpo rednio z systemu Windows gt Polecenia drukowania gt lpr Poprawna sk adnia dla polecenia Ipr jest nast puj ca c gt lpr S adres IP drukarki P nazwa drukarki o 1 Sciezka nazwa pliku c gt lpr S naz
98. aking Printer Settings no 29 3 Other Print Operations If Errors Occur with the Specified Paper Size and Type 31 Performing Formas 31 Canceling a Pants oia 31 Cancell g a Print Job aii alia lean 32 Canceling a Print ob Using the Control Panel 32 Canceling a Print ob from the Computer 32 Colo ds reed ee 33 A A A O RE 34 WA fiala pianisti 35 4 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Using Web Image MOnitol ccccccseessneeneeeeeesenseseeeeceeesesesseceeneceeseseeeeeneananees 37 Displaying Top P a gE r Tet ioa ern nee 39 Changing the Interface Language 39 Checking the System Information nee eee ernennen nennen nen 40 Configuring the Paper Settings 43 Configuring the Network Settings 45 Printing Repo isa aa RO deci a A A RAR ASR 52 Configuring the Administrator Settings 53 Displaying Web Image Monitor Help 56 Using Smart Organizing Monitor uurrsuuuneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnn 57 Installing Smart Organizing Monitor 57 Displaying the Smart Organizing Monitor Dialog BOX 58 Displaying the Printer Status 58 Displaying the Printer Information 60 AR A NEBEN END nn 62 Printer Status Notification by E Mail ueussssnnssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 66 Mall Authentcaton a 67 SNE A E E DES DR RP 0 Sigel ota italaduncechetes ea CAR ES 68 Reading the Configuration Page
99. an 16K 195 mm x 267 mm Cardstock Com 10 41 3 x 91 2 Label paper Note than normal when printing on Legal size paper O The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute may become lower Paper Recommendations Paper Recommendations Loading Paper Elmportant I g O Do not use ink jet printer paper because it may stick to the fusing unit and cause a paper misfeed When printing on OHP transparencies that have a print side load them with the print side over on the bypass tray Not taking this precaution may cause them to stick to the fusing unit and cause misfeeds Set the paper as described below e Tray 1 Print side facing down e Paper Feed Unit Tray 2 Print side facing down e Bypass Tray Print side facing up Print quality cannot be guaranteed if paper other than the ones recommended is used For more information about recommended paper contact your sales or service representative Do not use paper that has already been printed onto by other printers Specify the paper size and type using Smart Organizing Monitor The remaining paper indicator on the left front side of the paper tray shows approximately how much paper is remaining Storing Paper Paper should always be stored properly Improperly stored paper might re sult in poor print quality paper misfeeds or printer damage Recommenda tions are as follows e Avoid storing paper in humid areas e Avoid e
100. an contain up to 32 characters System Admin E mail Enter the system administrator s e mail ad dress This address is used as the sender s address of e mail messages sent from this printer such as alert e mail messages and Scan to E mail notifications Can contain up to 64 characters Timeout Seconds Enter the number of seconds the printer waits before considering an SMTP operation to have timed out 1 to 999 91 52 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Printing Reports Click Reports Print to display the page for printing reports Then select an item and click Print to print out information for that item tini lt Reports Print Item Description Configuration Page Prints general information about the printer and its current configuration PCL Font List The installed PCL font list is printed PS Font List The installed PS font list is printed 9 Note O Reports cannot be printed via Web Image Monitor if other jobs are being printed Before printing reports confirm that printer is not printing Using Web Image Monitor Configuring the Administrator Settings Click Admin Settings to display the page for configuring the administrator settings This page contains five tabs Password Default Settings Backup Settings Restore Settings and Help Source File Setting Configuring the Password Click the Password tab on the administrator setti
101. and then click Apply to start printing 9 Note O The procedure to open the Printing Preferences dialog box may vary depending on the application For details see the manuals provided with the application you use O Any settings you make in the procedure above are valid for the current application only O General users can change the properties displayed in the Print dialog box of an application Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application P Reference For details about settings see the printer driver Help Accessing the Printer Properties Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 Making Printer Settings Making the printer default settings the Printers and Faxes window iitimportant O To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default O You cannot change the printer default settings for each user Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users O On the Start menu click Printers and Faxes The Printers and Faxes window appears 2 Click the icon of the printer you want to use E on the File menu click Properties The printer properties dialog box appears 4 Make the necessary settings and then click OK 9 Note O Settings you make here are
102. anuals for this printer 2 Model types 4 Moving and transporting the printer 95 Moving over a long distance 96 N Network 27 O Opening manuals 6 Options 23 Other printing problems 79 P Panel indicator 74 Paper and other media 31 Paper feed roller 66 Paper feed unit 23 50 101 Paper not supported 38 Paper recommendations 33 Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels 1 Power switch symbols 1 Print area 39 Print cartridge 59 98 Printer does not print 75 Printer types 4 R Removing manuals from your computer 7 Removing misfed paper 85 bypass tray 88 duplex unit 90 exit area 90 inner 85 tray 1 85 tray 2 85 Replacing the print cartridge 59 103 S Setting the paper type 34 Smart Organizing Monitor 34 69 Specification 99 Specifying standard size paper tray 1 41 tray 2 50 Storing paper 33 T Toner 59 Tray 2 23 Turning the power on 21 Type 1 model 4 Type 2 model 4 Types of paper 34 U Unpacking 16 USB port 29 Using manuals 5 W Where to put the printer 13 104 EN EN US M012 8602 The meanings of the symbols for the switches on this machine are as follows POWER ON O POWER OFF Trademarks Microsoft Windows Windows Server and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat Acrobat Reader PostScript and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe
103. aper 2 Tray 1 and bypass tray Duplex supported size e Thick Paper 1 thick paper weighing 100 to 105 g m 26 6 to 28 0 Ib only A4 Legal 8 2 x 14 Letter 8 2 x 11 e Thick Paper 2 None Paper Recommendations Item Description Notes e The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is approximately half that of plain paper e The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute may become lower than normal when printing on paper of the following sizes A4 Legal 81 2 x 14 Letter 8 2 x 11 8 x 13 81 2 x 13 Folio 8 4 x 13 or 16K 195 x 267 mm e When using 135 g m 35 9 lb or heavier paper prints may be output with strong curls e When using 135 g m 35 9 lb or heavier paper take prints from the output tray frequently Thin paper Item Description Paper thickness 52 to 64 g m 13 8 to 17 0 lb Supported paper tray Any input tray can be used however tray 2 only supports thin paper weighing 60 to 64 g m 16 0 to 17 0 Ib Duplex supported size A4 Legal 81 2 x 14 Letter 8 2 x 11 Recycled paper Item Description Paper thickness 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 0 Ib Supported paper tray Any input tray can be used Duplex supported size A4 Legal 81 2 x 14 Letter 8 2 x 11 Notes If the paper thickness is outside the specified range select Thin Paper Thick
104. aper Feed Unit TK1080 lt Paper capacity 250 sheets Paper size A4 B5 JIS A5 Legal 8 2 x 14 Letter 81 2 x 11 Half Letter 51 2 x 81 2 lt Dimensions Width x Depth x Height 370 x 392 x 89 mm 14 6 x 15 5 x 3 5 inches Paper weight 60 to 105 g m 16 0 to 28 0 Ib Weight Less than 2 4 kg 5 3 lb 101 102 Appendix Electromagnetic Interference If this machine is located close to another electronic device both devices may malfunction due electromagnetic interference Televisions and radios may produce noise if located too close to this machine If this happens do the following e Move the television or radio as far as possible from the machine e Change the position of the antenna of the television or radio e Use a different wall outlet on a different circuit INDEX A Additional troubleshooting 83 Appendix 95 Auto duplex 4 C Cleaning 65 Connecting the printer network connection 27 USB connection 29 Consumables 98 D Disposal 97 E Error and status messages 69 Ethernet 27 Ethernet port 27 F Friction pad 66 G Guide to the printer control panel 12 exterior 9 interior 11 rear view 10 H How to read this manual 3 Installing manuals on your computer 5 Installing the optional paper feed unit 23 Installing the printer 13 L Loading envelopes 55 Loading paper 33 41 bypass tray 53 tray 1 41 tray 2 50 Manual duplex 4 M
105. application For details see the manuals provided with the application you use O Any settings you make in the procedure above are valid for the current application only O General users can change the properties displayed in the Print dialog box of an application Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application P Reference For details about settings see the printer driver Help ee RES 3 Other Print Operations If Errors Occur with the Specified Paper Size and Type Use the form feed function to continue printing when a problem such as a paper size and paper type error occurred This function can be performed using the control panel Elmportant O You cannot use Smart Organizing Monitor to change paper tray settings to resolve errors such as a paper type or size mismatch in a queued printjob To resolve such errors you must use Web Image Monitor to change the paper settings Alternatively perform form feed or reset the job O If the paper that is loaded is larger than the paper size specified in the printer driver using the form feed function could result in a paper jam Use form feed only if the paper is the same as or smaller than the paper size specified in the printer driver P Reference For details about Web Image Monitor see p 37 Using Web Image Monitor Performing Form Feed Follow the procedure below to perform form feed 1 If the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box with
106. are config ured to send alert e mail but e mail is not arriving After changing the setting turn the printer s power off and then back on again When no date information is in cluded in sent e mail the mail server has a malfunction Make the setting for obtaining time information from the SMTP server For details see Software Guide The printer is not detected after you click Search Network Printer in Smart Organizing Monitor The SNMP community name is not correctly configured Open Smart Organizing Monitor or Web Image Monitor and set Get community to public Note O If the printer is still not operating satisfactorily contact your sales or service representative Consult with the store where the printer was purchased for information about the location of sales or service representatives 83 84 Troubleshooting zzz TTT IT 8 Removing Misfed Paper When Paper is Jammed If a paper jam occurs the Alert indicator on the control panel flashes and the fol lowing message appears on the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box Paper Misfeed Open the indicated cover or pull out the indicated unit and then remove any misfed paper iitimportant O Misfed paper may be covered in toner Be careful not to get toner on your hands or clothes O Toner on prints made after removing misfed paper may be loose inadequate ly fused Make a few test prints until smudges no longer appear
107. as Liite gt Tekniset tiedot gt P yksikk Turvallisuustiedot Lait ja s d kset gt Laserturvallisuus T m tuote t ytt seuraavat turvallisuusvaatimukset Laite t ytt IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 vaatimukset luokan 1 laserlaitteelle Ohjelmisto opas Tulostamisen valmistelu gt Tulostimen lis asetusten valitseminen gt Jos kaksisuuntainen yhteys ei ole k yt ss Kun Kaksisuuntaisuuden tuki ei ole valittuna Smart Organizing Monitoria ei voi k ytt Valitse Kaksisuuntaisuuden tuki k ytt ksesi sovellusta Ohjelmisto opas Muut tulostustoiminnot gt Jos m ritetyll paperikoolla ja tyypill tapahtuu virhe Jos tapahtuu tulostusvirhe asetuksia ei voi muuttaa Smart Organizing Monitorissa Ohjelmisto opas Tulostimen valvonta ja m ritykset gt Web Image Monitorin k ytt minen gt J rjestelm tietojen tarkistaminen gt Laskurin tietojen tarkistaminen N ytt kaksipuoleisten tulosteiden kokonaism r n Ohjelmisto opas Tulostimen valvonta ja m ritykset gt Web Image Monitorin k ytt minen gt Verkkoasetusten m ritt minen gt Verkkosovelluksen asetusten m ritt minen l m rit 53550 n lis ksi 49999 Portin nro kentt n kohdassa Verkkoon skannauksen asetukset Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 19 Print M0128681 doc Page 20 of 32 is Ohjelmisto opas Tulos
108. at si eredm ny nem lesz megfelel Hardver tmutat Pap r s egy b hordoz k gt Pap r bet lt se gt Pap r bet lt se a k zi adagol ba gt Bor t k bet lt se Az eredetileg nyitott f lekkel rendelkez bor t kokat nyitott f llel a z rt f lekkel rendelkez bor t kokat pedig z rt f llel helyezze a nyomtat ba A behelyez s el tt gondoskodjon r la hogy a bor t kok a lehet leglaposabb llapotban legyenek Hardver tmutat F ggel k gt Adatok gt Alapg p Biztons gi tudnival k T rv nyek s rendelkez sek gt L zerbiztons g Ez a term k megfelel a k vetkez biztons gi szabv nynak Ez a k sz l k megfelel az 1 oszt lyba sorolt l zerk sz l kek IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 k vetelm nyeinek Szoftver tmutat Felk sz l s a nyomtat sra gt Opcion lis be llit sok l trehoz sa a nyomtat hoz gt Ha a k tir ny kommunik ci le van tiltva Ha a K tir ny t mogat s enged lyez se nincs kiv lasztva a Smart Organizing Monitor nem haszn lhat V lassza ki a K tir ny t mogat s enged lyez se opci t a szoftver haszn lat hoz Szoftver tmutat Egy b nyomtat si m veletek gt Ha hib k jelentkeznek a megadott pap rm retn l s t pusn l Ha nyomtat si hiba t rt nik a be ll t sok nem v ltoztathat k meg a Smart Organizing Monitor haszn lat val Szoftver tmutat A nyomtat monitoroz sa s konfigu
109. ation s affiche cliquez sur Terminer Remarque Sila configuration de l adresse IP ou la recherche de l imprimante choue assurez vous que l imprimante est connect e au m me segment de r seau que l ordinateur Il presente manuale descrive brevemente la procedura di installazione del driver della stampante nell ambiente di rete Se la stampante viene utilizzata con il cavo USB vedere la Guida software per l installazione del driver della stampante Per un utilizzo corretto leggere la Guida di installazione rapida e configurare le impostazioni descritte L utilizzo della stampante richiede le quattro fasi seguenti 1 Stampa di una pagina di prova 2 Installazione dello Smart Organizing Monitor se necessario 3 Inserimento dell indirizzo IP della stampante se necessario 4 Installazione del driver della stampante Nota Se la stampante ottiene l indirizzo IP automaticamente da un server DHCP non necessario effettuare le fasi 2 Installazione dello Smart Organizing Monitor e 3 Inserimento dell indirizzo IP della stampante Stampa di una pagina di prova Collegare la stampante al computer utilizzando un cavo Ethernet Tenendo premuto il tasto Reset lavoro azionare l interruttore della stampante e tenere il tasto premuto finch la spia Avviso inizia a lampeggiare La stampa inizia circa 30 secondi dopo l accensione della spia Avviso Controllare l indirizzo IP stampato sulla pag
110. can print the following lt Configuration Page The current configurations and general information of the printer are printed lt PCL Config Font Page The installed PCL font list is printed lt PS Config Font Page The installed PS font list is printed The procedure for printing the configuration page is described as an example O On the User Tools tab in the List Test Print list select Configuration Page B click Print P Reference For details about the items displayed on the configuration page see p 69 Reading the Configuration Page 61 62 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Printer Configuration You can use the Printer Configuration dialog box to change the current printer settings To display the Printer Configuration dialog box and change printer settings on the User Tools tab click Printer Configuration Elmportant O The Printer Configuration is disabled when the printer is not in the ready state or power save mode You can use the Printer Configuration dialog box to change the settings of e Paper Input e Maintenance e System e Network e Printer 9 Note O Printer Configuration can be used only when there are no print jobs waiting to be processed on this printer P Reference For details about each item you can specify in the Printer Configuration dialog box see Smart Organizing Monitor Help About menu and mode There are two modes you can use to a
111. cated cover and correctly or not set See p 59 Replacing the Print then check Print Cartridge Cartridge Front Cover 73 74 Troubleshooting Panel Indicator The following table explains the meaning of the various Indicator patterns that the printer alerts to users about its conditions Indicator patterns Cause All indicators are lit There are problems with the printer Check the printer status on the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box After checking the printer s status turn off the main power and then turn it back on again If all the indicators are still lit contact your service representative The Alert indicator is flashing Printer s settings are being returned to their factory set defaults The Alert indicator is lit The printer cannot be used normally Confirm the error using Smart Organizing Monitor The Ready indicator is flashing The printer is receiving print data or preparing to print The Ready indicator is lit The printer is ready for use The Load Paper indicator is lit There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray See p 41 Loading Paper The Replace Print Car tridge indicator is flashing The print cartridge is almost empty The Replace Print Car tridge indicator is lit The print cartridge is empty Replace the print cartridge See p 59 Replacing the Print Cartridge P
112. ccess the Printer Configuration dialog box administrator mode and general users mode Available tabs in the Printer Configuration dialog box differ depending on the mode you are in Administrator In the Access Code dialog box enter an access code All tabs in the Printer Configuration dialog box are available lt General users Only the Paper Input tab is available Using Smart Organizing Monitor Changing the paper settings On the Paper Input tab you can change paper size and other paper settings Tray 1 e Paper Size The following sizes are available A4 210 x 297 mm B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm A5 148 x 210 mm B6 JIS 128 x 182 mm A6 105 x 148 mm 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 51 2x81 2 71 4x101 2 8x13 81 2x13 81 4x 13 16K Custom Paper Size e Paper Type The following paper types are available Thin Paper Thick Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Plain Paper 1 Recycled Paper Color Paper Preprinted Paper Prepunched Paper Letterhead Bond Paper Cardstock Labels e Custom Paper Size You can make the custom paper size settings when Custom Paper Size is selected e Unit Specify the unit of measurement in mm or inch e Horizontal Specify the horizontal width between 100 and 216 mm 3 94 and 8 50 inch e Vertical Specify the vertical length between 148 and 356 mm 5 83 and 14 02 inch Tray 2 e Paper Size You can specify the paper size for tray 2 The following sizes are available A
113. ce gt Especificaciones gt Unidad principal Informaci n de seguridad Leyes y normativas gt Seguridad de l ser Este producto cumple las siguientes normativas de seguridad La m quina cumple los requisitos de IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 para los productos l ser de clase 1 Manual de software Preparativos para imprimir gt Configuraci n de las opciones de la impresora gt Si la comunicaci n bidireccional est desactivada Si Habilitar compatibilidad bidireccional no est seleccionado Smart Organizing Monitor no se puede utilizar Seleccione Habilitar compatibilidad bidireccional para utilizar el software Manual de software Otras operaciones de impresi n gt Si se producen errores con el tamafio y tipo de papel especificado Si se produce un error de impresi n la configuraci n no puede cambiarse con Smart Organizing Monitor Manual de software Supervisi n y configuraci n de la impresora gt Uso de Web Image Monitor gt Comprobaci n de la informaci n del sistema gt Comprobaci n de la informaci n del contador Muestra el total de hojas impresas por ambas caras 11 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 12 of 32 Manual de software Supervisi n y configuraci n de la impresora gt Uso de Web Image Monitor gt Ajustes de la configuraci n de red gt Ajustes de la configuraci n de la aplicaci n d
114. ce File Setting 56 Installing Download 7 network environment 8 PCL printer driver 8 PostScript 3 printer driver 13 USB 16 J Job Log tab 60 61 L Language 39 Limitations Citrix Presentation Server Citrix XenApp 102 Windows Terminal Service 102 Machine information 42 Mac OS X 79 canceling a print job 86 option setting 84 paper settings from an application 85 setting up for printing 85 Mail authentication 67 Making option settings 23 Manual Duplex 3 36 Model types 3 103 N Network environment setup 75 Network settings 45 P Paper settings 43 Paper tray 40 PCL 65 95 PCL 6 printer driver 97 PCL Config Font Page 61 91 PCL printer driver 8 PostScript 3 printer driver 13 87 97 PPD files 97 setting up 83 Print cartridge 40 Printer Configuration administrator 62 92 general users 62 92 menu and mode 62 92 Printer configuration 61 62 91 92 Printer drivers 97 Printer Drivers and Utilities 8 13 Printer Driver Selection 58 Printer information 60 90 Printer properties PCL printer drivers 25 Windows 2000 25 Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 27 Windows XP 27 Printer settings application 26 28 30 PCL printer drivers 25 Printers and Faxes window 27 Printer window 25 29 Printing Preferences 26 28 30 Printer Setup Utility 83 Printer status 60 90 Printer tab 65 95 Printer types 3 Printing commands 76 ftp 77 Ipr 76 Printing files directly from Windows
115. che Tonerstaub kan beim kontakt mit offenem Feuer explodieren 150 Non gettare il toner o i contenitori del toner sul fuoco La polvere del toner si pu incendiare dalla fiamma No incinere el tner ni os contenedores de t ner EL polvo de t ner puede inflamars al ser expuesto al fuego AVI ADVERTENCIA N o exponha o Toner ou a sua embalagem ao fogo O p de Toner poder explodir quando exposto a chama via BE ehr Nihr DASKEBEERRIFFONHICHALHUTSTEEN REST SHENTSD ET Do not incinerate toner or toner containers Toner dust may cause flashback when exposed to an open flame 2 Do not touch the parts a label indicates The inside of the machine could be very hot Do not touch the parts a label indicates The inside of the machine could be very hot Power Switch Symbols The meanings of the symbols for the switches on this machine are as follows e POWER ON e O POWER OFF nz gt 18 ille RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 9 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM Environmental Features Type 1 Model This machine is equipped with the following Energy Saver modes Energy Saver mode 1 and Energy Saver mode 2 The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job or when the Stop Start key is pressed Energy Saver mode 1 This machine automatically enters Energy Saver mode 1 about 30 seconds af ter the last operation is completed Energy Saver mode 2 This mach
116. cintosh Environment Bypass Tray Paper Size In the Paper Size list select the size of paper loaded in the input tray When Custom Paper Size is selected specify one of the sizes below Paper Type In the Paper Type list select the paper type Custom Paper Size Enter the custom paper size when Custom Paper Size is selected e Unit Select which units mm or inch to use for entering lengths in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes e Horizontal Vertical Enter the custom paper size when Custom Paper Size is selected In the units selected earlier mm or inch enter the length of the paper s short and long edges in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes respectively Note Available paper sizes vary depending on the paper tray For details about set ting the paper size see the printer operating instructions Tray Priority Select the tray used for the priority paper source Tray Priority is the tray selected immediately after the printer is turned on and when Auto Select is chosen as the paper source for a job Printer Configuration Maintenance Tab Make settings for adjusting printing position Registration Tray 1 Adjust the position of Tray if it is installed Print Test Sheet Click this button to check the printing position using a test print Horizontal After printing the test sheet you can adjust the horizontal print position in the range of from 15 to 15 in increments of 0 1 mm
117. contact your local dealer Depending on which country you are in certain units may be optional For details please contact your local dealer Caution Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure For good print quality the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner maintenance kits and parts from the supplier The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of con sumables toner maintenance kits and parts other than genuine consumables from the supplier with your office products TABLE OF CONTENTS Positions of WARNING and ACAUTION labels 1 e vs 1 Power Swit h Symbols n cia ilo ta its 1 Manuals for This Printer aan Hanna 2 How to Read This Manual u ee 3 DVIMDOIMS EE dalia EE EAE EA 3 Print r Type Ss a d ra aba uni ora 4 Using Manuals gote arteatro ani ria ti la 5 Installing Manuals on Your Computer rear 5 Opening Manuals idiota 6 Removing Manuals from Your Computer i 7 1 Guide to the Printer Exterior Front VIEW aria 9 Exterior Rear Vie Wins 10 IO ida 11 Conmirol Panel iaia csc ott heath a ra a Ss ala Aa aed 12 2 Installing the Printer and Options Installing the Printer len 13 YW here to Putthe Printer 2 22 bia Ra het dida 13 Unpacking a ira 42 ren nen 16 Turning t
118. control panel light up or the following message appears on the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box replace the print cartridge No Toner No Toner or Waste Toner full Elmportant O Do not allow paper clips staples or other small metallic objects to fall inside the printer O Do not expose the print cartridge without its cover to direct sunlight for a long time O Do not touch the print cartridge s photo conductor unit BSP024S O If toner runs out you cannot print until the print cartridge is replaced O If paper is loaded in the bypass tray remove the paper and close the bypass tray 2 Push the side button to open the front cover and then carefully lower it BXG057 60 Replacing the Print Cartridge 3 Carefully pull out the print cartridge horizontally holding its center e Do not shake the removed print cartridge Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak e Place the old print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace 4 Take the new print cartridge out of the box and then take it out of the plas Ga tic bag BSP195S 5 Place the print cartridge on a flat surface and then remove the protection sheet BSP037S 61 Replacing Consumables 6 Hold the print cartridge and shake it from side to side five or six times 5 6 e BSP038S Even distribution of toner within the bottle impro
119. crosoft Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Datacenter Edition The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Datacenter 9 Note O PostScript 3 in this manual stands for Adobe PostScript 3 Emulation Copyright 2009 SP 3400N SP 3410DN Operating Instructions Software Guide CGB US M012 8604 EN EN Software Installation Guide for Network Connection Software Installationsanleitung fur Netzwerkverbindungen SP 3400N SP 3410DN M0128614 This manual briefly describes the procedure for installa tion of the printer driver under the network environment If you use this printer using the USB cable see Software Guide for the installation of the printer driver For correct use please be sure to read Quick Installation Guide and complete the settings described in the guide The following four steps are required to use this printer 1 Printing a test page 2 Installing Smart Organizing Monitor if necessary 3 Specifying the printer s IP address if necessary 4 Installing the printer driver Note If the printer is obtaining its IP address automatical
120. d is an intrinsic printer option and its syn tax is similar to printing from UNIX Ipr When specifying a printer by IP address c gt lpr S printer s IP address P Option o 1 path file name When specifying a printer by host name instead of IP address c gt lpr S printer host name P Option o 1 path file name To print a binary file include the o 1 switch a dash followed by a lowercase O and L after the printer name Printing Files Directly from Windows ftp Use the put or mput command according to the number of files to be printed lt When one file is printed ftp gt put path file name option When multiple files are printed ftp gt mput path file name path file name option O Formulate the printer s IP address or the host name of the hosts file printer as an argument and use the ftp command ftp printer s IP address 2 Enter the user name and password and then press the Enter key For details about the user name and password consult your network admin istrator User Password 3 When printing a binary file set the file mode to binary ftp gt bin When printing a binary file in ASCII mode print may not come out correctly O Specify files to be printed The following shows the examples of printing a PostScript 3 file named file 1 in the C N PRINT directory and printing file 1 and file 2 ftp gt put C PRINT filel filetype RPS
121. d onto Bond paper Item Description Paper thickness 105 to 160 g m 28 0 to 42 6 Ib Supported paper tray Tray 1 and bypass tray Duplex supported size None Notes e The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is approximately half that of plain paper e When using 135 g m 35 9 lb or heavier paper prints may be output with strong curls e When using 135 g m 35 9 lb or heavier paper take prints from the output tray frequently e Ifthe paper thickness is outside the specified range select Plain Paper or Thick Paper 1 Paper Recommendations 4 Cardstock Item Description Paper thickness 105 to 160 g m 28 0 to 42 6 Ib Supported paper tray Tray 1 and bypass tray Duplex supported size None Notes The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is approximately half that of plain paper When using 135 g m 35 9 lb or heavier paper prints may be output with strong curls When using 135 g m 35 9 Ib or heavier paper take prints from the output tray frequently Paper thicker than 160 g m cannot be printed onto lt Label paper Item Description Supported paper tray Tray 1 and bypass tray Duplex supported size None Notes The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is approximately half that of plain paper Avoid using adhesive label paper on which glue
122. den av skriveren Koble kabelenden med ferrittkjernen til skriveren C Koble den andre enden av kabelen til nettverket for eksempel ved hjelp av en hub Maskinvareveiledning Papir og annet utskriftsmateriale gt Papiranbefalinger gt Legge i papir Nar du har lagt papir i magasinet angi alltid papirtypen og formatet for magasinet ved hjelp av Smart Organizing Monitor eller Web Image Monitor Hvis skriver og skriverdriverinnstillingene ikke samsvarer blir kanskje ikke utskriftsresultatet som forventet Maskinvareveiledning Papir og annet utskriftsmateriale gt Legge i papir gt Mate inn papir ved hjelp av multiarkmateren gt Legge i konvolutter Konvolutter med pen klaff m skrives ut med klaffen pen og konvolutter med lukket klaff m skrives ut med klaffen lukket F r du legger i konvolutter s rg for at de ligger s flatt som mulig Maskinvareveiledning Tillegg gt Spesifikasjoner gt Hovedenhet Sikkerhetsinformasjon Lover og regler gt Laser sikkerhet Dette produktet samsvarer med f lgende sikkerhetsstandarder Denne maskinen samsvarer med kravene i IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 for laserprodukter klasse 1 Programvareveiledning Klargj re for utskrift gt Angi innstillinger for tilleggsutstyr for skriveren gt Hvis toveiskommunikasjon er deaktivert Nar Aktiver toveis st tte ikke er valgt kan ikke Smart Organizing Monitor brukes Velg Aktiver toveis st tte for bruke prog
123. dialog box See the printer driver Help The whole printout is blurred e Paper is damp Use paper that has been stored properly See p 31 Paper and Other Media e If you select Toner Saving on the Print Quality tab in the printer properties dialog box printing is generally less dense See the printer driver Help e Toner is almost depleted If a toner indicator lights or flashes or if an error message appears on the Smart Or ganizing Monitor dialog box replace the print cartridge See p 59 Replacing the Print Cartridge e Condensation may have collected If rapid change in tem perature or humidity occurs use this printer only after it has acclimatized White streaks appear e Toner is almost depleted If a toner indicator lights or flashes or if an error message appears on the Smart Or ganizing Monitor dialog box replace the print cartridge See p 59 Replacing the Print Cartridge The backs of printed sheets are blemished When removing a jammed sheet the inside of the printer may have become dirtied Print several sheets until they come out clean e If document size is larger than paper size e g A4 docu ment on B5 paper the back of the next printed sheet may be dirtied If rubbed with your finger it smears out The setting of the paper may not be correct For example although thick paper is used the setting for thick paper may not be set e Check the paper sett
124. die CD ROM in das CD ROM Laufwerk ein Eine Sprache f r die Benutzeroberfl che w hlen und dann auf OK klicken Auf Smart Organizing Monitor klicken W hlen Sie eine Sprache f r das Installationsprogramm Smart Organizing Monitor und klicken Sie dann auf Weiter gt Klicken Sie auf Weiter gt Klicken Sie nach dem Lesen der Vereinbarung auf J a Klicken Sie zweimal auf Weiter gt Klicken Sie auf Fertig stellen Festlegen der IP Adresse des Druckers Zeigen Sie im Men Start auf Alle Programme gt Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series gt Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series Status um den Smart Organizing Monitor zu starten Hinweis W hlen Sie unter Windows Vista Als Administrator ausf hren um den Smart Organizing Monitor zu starten Klicken Sie auf IP Adresse und geben Sie dann die MAC Adresse des Druckers ein die auf die Testseite gedruckt wurde Beispiel 00 11 22 aa bb cc im Feld MAC Adresse Geben Sie im Feld IP Adresse die IP Adresse ein die Sie f r den Drucker einstellen wollen Klicken Sie zweimal auf OK und klicken Sie dann auf Schlie en Installieren des Druckertreibers Klicken Sie im Dialogfeld Printer Drivers and Utilities auf den Namen des Druckertreibers den Sie installieren wollen Klicken Sie nach dem Lesen der Vereinbarung auf Ich akzeptiere die Lizenzvereinbarung und klicken Sie anschlie end auf Weiter gt
125. do Smart Organizing Monitor Guida software Monitoraggio e configurazione della stampante gt Utilizzo di Web Image Monitor gt Controllo delle informazioni di sistema gt Controllo delle informazioni del contatore Mostra il numero totale dei fogli stampati su entrambe le facciate 7 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 8 of 32 Guida software Monitoraggio e configurazione della stampante gt Utilizzo di Web Image Monitor gt Configurazione delle impostazioni di rete gt Configurazione delle impostazioni di applicazione rete Non specificare 49999 in aggiunta a 53550 per Porta n in Impostazioni stampa di rete Guida software Monitoraggio e configurazione della stampante gt Utilizzo di Web Image Monitor gt Configurazione delle impostazioni di rete gt Configurazione delle impostazioni DNS Per Timeout DNS secondi pu essere specificato un numero tra 1 e 999 Guida software Monitoraggio e configurazione della stampante gt Utilizzo dello Smart Organizing Monitor gt Visualizzazione dello stato stampante Quando si stampa tramite connessione USB l informazione della stampante in Smart Organizing Monitor potrebbe non risultare correttamente aggiornata Guida software Operazioni speciali in Windows gt Stampa di file direttamente da Windows gt Comandi di stampa gt lpr La sintassi corretta per il c
126. dows Server 2003 R2 are as follows Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Datacenter Edition The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Datacenter Note O PostScript 3 in this manual stands for Adobe PostScript 3 Emulation Copyright 2009 SP 3400N SP 3410DN Operating Instructions Hardware Guide EN GB EN US M012 8602 o 00000060 Soe SP 3400N SP 3410DN Operating Instructions Software Guide 1 Preparing for Printing 2 Setting Up the Printer Driver 3 Other Print Operations 4 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer 5 Using a Print Server 6 Special Operations under Windows Mac OS X Configuration Appendix Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference For safe and correct use be sure to read Safety Information before using the machine Introduction This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine For your safety and benefit read this manual carefully before using the machine Keep this manual in a handy place for quick reference Important Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice
127. dust Otherwise a fire or an elec tric shock might occur Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface If it topples over an injury might occur Keep the machine in an area that is within optimum environmental condi tions Operating the machine in an environment that is outside the recom mended ranges of humidity and temperature can cause an electrical fire hazard Keep the area around the socket free of dust Accumulated dust can become an electrical fire hazard Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spa cious Good ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily Machine sound levels exceeding gt 65 8 dB A are not suitable for desk work environments so place the machine in another room When new electrical devices containing volatile materials will normally re lease emissions into the air of their vicinity For this reason for the first few days after installation of a new device strong ventilation inside the room where itis placed is necessary 9 Note O When you use this machine for a long time in a confined space without good ventilation you may detect an odd smell To keep the workplace comfortable we recommend that you keep it well ventilated O To avoid possible build up ozone make sure to locate this machine in a large well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30 m hr person PI La
128. e 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 6 of 32 Manuel du logiciel Surveillance et configuration de l imprimante gt Utilisation de Web Image Monitor gt Configuration des param tres r seau gt Configuration des param tres d application r seau Ne sp cifiez pas 49999 en plus de 53550 pour Num ro du port sous Param tres impression r seau Manuel du logiciel Surveillance et configuration de l imprimante gt Utilisation de Web Image Monitor gt Configuration des param tres r seau gt Configuration des param tres DNS Il est possible de d finir un nombre entre 1 et 999 pour Expir de d lai DNS sec Manuel du logiciel Surveillance et configuration de l imprimante gt Utilisation de Smart Organizing Monitor gt Affichage de l tat de l imprimante Lorsque vous imprimez via une connexion USB il est possible que les informations d impression dans Smart Organizing Monitor ne soient pas mises jour correctement Manuel du logiciel Op rations particuli res sous Windows gt Impression directe de fichiers partir de Windows gt Commandes d impression gt lpr La syntaxe correcte pour la commande Ipr est la suivante c gt Ipr S adresse IP de l imprimante P nom de l imprimante o 1 chemin d acc s nom du fichier c gt Ipr S nom d h te de l imprimante P nom de l imprimante o 1 chemin d acc s nom du fichier Manuel du logiciel Op rati
129. e If it topples over an injury might occur Keep the machine in an area that is within optimum environmental condi tions Operating the machine in an environment that is outside the recom mended ranges of humidity and temperature can cause an electrical fire hazard Keep the area around the socket free of dust Accumulated dust can become an electrical fire hazard Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spacious Good ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily Machine sound levels exceeding L n gt 65 8dB A are not suitable for desk work environments so place the machine in another room When new electrical devices containing volatile materials will normally re lease emissions into the air of their vicinity For this reason for the first few days after installation of a new device strong ventilation inside the room where it is placed is necessary Space Required for Installation The recommended or minimum space requirements are as follows BXG007 Installing the Printer lt Optimum Environmental Conditions Permissible and recommended temperature and humidity ranges are as fol lows RH 50 60 70 80 90 F 10 C 50 F 80 __27 C 80 6 F 80 80 60 40 20 10 C 50 F 15 32 C 89 6 F 15 BSP023S e White area Permissible Range e Gray area Recommended Range 9 Note O To avoid buildup of ozone b
130. e Anleitung Spezielle Funktionsvorg nge unter Windows gt Dateien direkt unter Windows drucken gt Druckbefehle gt ftp User und Password zum bertragen von Daten ber ftp sind beide festgelegt auf sysadm Zum bertragen von Daten ber ftp geben Sie sysadm ein Installation des Druckers gt Auspacken Kurzanleitung zur Installation 2 Auspacken Thema Fehler Berichtigung Hardware Anleitung 5 Entfemen Sie das im Inneren des 5 Entfernen Sie das im Inneren des Installation des Druckers und der Optionen gt Druckers angebrachte Schutzmaterial Druckers angebrachte Schutzmaterial AMI BxGOIs Die folgenden Beschreibungen treffen auf dieses Ger t nicht zu Thema Fehler Hardware Anleitung _ AnschlieBen des Druckers gt PHEwicntig Netzwerkverbindung Verwenden Sie ein abgeschirmtes Ethemet Kabel Nicht abgeschi verursachen elektromagnetische St rungen die zu Fehlfunktionen f hren k nnen Hardware Anleitung Papier und andere Medien gt Hinweise zum Papier gt Papierarten und sonstige Druckmedien gt Papiertypen Hardware Anleitung Papier und andere Medien gt Einlegen von Papier gt Einlegen von Papier in den Bypass gt Einlegen von Umschl gen Vermeiden Sie die Verwendung von selbstklebenden Umschl gen Sie k nnten zu einer Fehlfunktion f hren Hardware Anleitung Fehlerbehebung gt Fehler amp Statusmeldungen auf dem Smart Organizin
131. e Guide Other Print Operations gt If Errors Occur with the Specified Paper Size and Type When a print error occurs the settings cannot be changed using Smart Organizing Monitor Software Guide Monitoring and Configuring the Printer gt Using Web Image Monitor gt Checking the System Information gt Checking the Counter Information Shows the total number of sheets printed on both sides Print M0128681 doc Page 2 of 32 Software Guide Monitoring and Configuring the Printer gt Using Web Image Monitor gt Configuring the Network Settings gt Configuring the Network Application Settings Do not specify 49999 in addition to 53550 for Port under Network Print Settings Software Guide Monitoring and Configuring the Printer gt Using Web Image Monitor gt Configuring the Network Settings gt Configuring the DNS Settings Software Guide Monitoring and Configuring the Printer gt Using Smart Organizing Monitor gt Displaying the Printer Status A number between 1 through 999 can be specified for DNS Timeout Seconds When you are printing via USB connection the printer information in Smart Organizing Monitor might not be updated correctly Software Guide Special Operations under Windows gt Printing Files Directly from Windows gt Printing Commands gt Ipr The correct syntax for the Ipr command is as follows c gt lpr S printer s IP address P printer name
132. e Software para Liga o de Rede Ap s este procedimento avance para o passo seguinte em cada manual Utilizadores na Uni o Europeia cuIDADO T m de ser usados cabos com o conveniente revestimento e ligag o terra para ligar ao host e ou perif ricos de modo a cumprir os limites de emiss es Utilizadores no Estados Unidos da Am rica CUIDADO T m de ser usados cabos com o conveniente revestimento e liga o terra para ligar ao host e ou perif ricos de modo a cumprir os limites de emiss es FCC Todos os Utilizadores A fomecido com este equipamento um n cleo de ferrite para o cabo de interface Ethernet Fa a uma volta no cabo a cerca de 5 cm 2 polegadas da extremidade do cabo do lado do equipamento Fixe o n cleo de ferrite B Ligue o cabo Ethernet porta Ethernet localizada na retaguarda da impressora Ligue a extremidade do cabo com o n cleo de ferrite impressora C Ligue a outra extremidade do cabo rede por exemplo usando um hub Guia de Hardware Papel e outros suportes gt Recomenda es de Papel gt Colocar papel Quando tiver colocado papel numa bandeja defina sempre o tipo e o formato do papel para a bandeja com o Smart Organizing Monitor ou o Web Image Monitor Se as defini es na impressora e no driver de impress o n o corresponderem os resultados de impress o podem n o sair como esperado Guia de Hardware Papel e outros suportes gt Colocar pap
133. e TCP IP using Smart Organizing Monitor and then set up the printer s network environment about TCP IP including IP addresses TCP IP of the printer is set as default 2 Install a TCP IP in Windows to set up the network environment Consult the network administrator for the local setting information Bro print under Windows 2000 XP Vista or Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 install Printing service for UNIX as the network application LP Reference For details about setting the IPv4 address of the printer using DHCP see p 99 Using DHCP 75 76 Special Operations under Windows Printing Commands The following explains printing operations using the lpr commands Enter commands using the command prompt window The location of the command prompt varies depending on operating systems e Windows 2000 Start Programs Accessories Command Prompt e Windows XP Vista Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 Start All Programs Accessories Command Prompt Note O Match the data format of the file to be printed with the emulation mode of this printer O If the message print requests full appears no print jobs can be accepted Try again when sessions end For each command the amount of possible sessions is indicated as follows e lpr 10 e ftp 3 O Enter the file name in a format including the path from the directory executing commands P Reference The option specified in a comman
134. e flamme AVVISO Verbrennen Sie keinen Toner oder Tonerkartusche Tonerstaub kann beim kontakt mit offenem Feuer explodieren O Non gettare il toner o i contenitori del toner sul fuoco La polvere del toner si pu incendiare dalla fiamma ADVERTENCIA No incinere el t ner ni los contenedores de t ner El polvo de t ner puede inflamarse al ser expuesto al fuego N o exponha o Toner ou a sua embalagem ao fogo O p de Toner poder explodir quando exposto a chama viva BE eb Nlt ht OA oh SBE EERIPSONPCBALBUT CRA REETIBTNNDOES Do not incinerate toner or toner containers Toner dust may cause flashback when exposed to an open flame a Do not touch the parts a label indicates The inside of the machine could be very hot Do not touch the parts a label indicates The inside of the machine could be very hot Power Switch Symbols The meanings of the symbols for the switches on this machine are as follows e POWERON e O POWER OFF Manuals for This Printer For particular functions see the relevant parts of the manual Safety Information Provides information on safe usage of this printer To avoid injury and prevent damage to the printer be sure to read this lt Quick Installation Guide Contains procedures for removing the printer from its box and connecting it to a computer lt Hardware Guide This manual Contains information about paper and procedures such as installing options replacing consu
135. e number of printers con nected O The USB port is available only for the printer driver that is installed first To install additional drivers for this printer install them using other ports such as LPT1 Then after the installation change the port settings to the specified USB port Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 Elmportant O To install this printer driver you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission Log on as an Administrators group member If the printer driver has already been installed plug and play is enabled and the icon of the printer connected to the USB portis added to the Printers window If the printer driver is not installed follow the plug and play instructions of the printer to install it from the CD ROM provided E insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive When Auto Run starts click Exit 2 Check the printer s power switch is turned to off E Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable Connect the USB cable firmly 4 Turn the printer s power switch back to on The Plug and Play is enabled and the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears and USB Printing Support is installed automatically E Select No not this time and then click Next gt g In the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box click Install from a list or specific location Advanced and then click Next gt 7 Select the
136. e paper loaded into each input tray e Paper Type Displays the type of the paper loaded into each input tray Maintenance Displays the name of consumables and uses graphics to indicate their statuses System Displays the system information about the printer such as the model name system version and memory size Counter Displays information about the counters Network Displays network details such as the printer s IP address and network related comments P Reference For details about each item in the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box see Smart Organizing Monitor Help You can print information that appears on the Status tab For details see p 61 Printing the printer configurations Using Smart Organizing Monitor Displaying the job history On the Job Log tab print jobs are displayed in the list You can check the following information e File Name e Page s e Start Date e Status A Note 9 Normally the names used to log on to Windows are displayed in the User Name column Printing the printer configurations On the User Tools tab you can print lists of printer information Elmportant O You can print the configuration page only when the printer is not busy processing jobs O To print information about the printer the printer must be monitored from Smart Organizing Monitor via a supported printer driver In the List Test Print list select the item you want to print You
137. e printer browser to check if the printer is displayed Using About This Mac 1 Click Apple Menu and then select About This Mac 2 Click More Info E Under Contents for Hardware select USB Using the printer browser O In the menu bar click Go select Application and then select Utilities F Double click Printer Setup Utility E click Ada The printer browser starts Confirm the printer is displayed on the browser If it is not reinstall the driver Other Printing Problems Other Printing Problems Status Possible Causes Descriptions and Solutions Toner smears appear on the print side of the page The paper setting may not be correct For example although you are using thick paper the setting for thick paper may not be set e Check the printer driver s paper settings See the printer driver Help Confirm that the paper is not curled or bent Envelopes can be curled easily Flatten paper before loading See p 31 Paper and Other Media Paper jams occur frequently e Number of paper set in the tray exceeds the limit Con firm that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray See p 41 Loading Paper e There may be a gap between the front end paper guide and the paper or between the paper guide both side and the paper in the paper tray Make sure there are no gaps See p 41 Loading Paper e Paper is either too thick or too thin
138. e printer is turned off The access code can be changed on this tab Making network related settings On the Network 1 Network 2 and Network 3 tabs you can set configurations about network connection and communication The following operations are possible on these tabs e Checking the device name and other printer information e Making interface settings including the timeout setting e Checking or making TCP IP settings e Checking or making SMTP settings e Checking or making SNMP and Alert settings Settings conditions for printing On the Printer tab you can set conditions for printing In the PCL area you can specify the conditions such as Orientation and font settings 9 Note O Only PCL related settings can be modified in this area 95 96 Mac OS X Configuration 8 Appendix Software and Utilities Included on the CD ROM The following software and utility are included in the CD ROMs that come with this printer lt Smart Organizing Monitor Allows users and system administrators to check and configure the printer from a client computer Viewing the contents of the CD ROM Follow the procedure below to view the contents of the CD ROM insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive The installer starts E click Browse This CD ROM Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD ROM Printer Drivers for this Printer Printing requires installing a printer driver appropriate to your
139. e red No especifique 49999 adem s de 53550 para Puerto N en Config de impresi n de red Manual de software Supervisi n y configuraci n de la impresora gt Uso de Web Image Monitor gt Ajustes de la configuraci n de red gt Ajustes de la configuraci n DNS Manual de software Supervisi n y configuraci n de la impresora gt Uso de Smart Organizing Monitor gt Mostrar el estado de la impresora Puede especificar un n mero entre 1 y 999 para Tiempo espera DNS seg Si est imprimiendo a trav s de una conexi n USB la informaci n de la impresora de Smart Organizing Monitor puede que no se actualice correctamente Manual de software Operaciones especiales en Windows gt Imprimir archivos directamente desde Windows gt Comandos de impresi n gt lpr La sintaxis correcta para el comando lpr es la siguiente c gt Ipr S direcci n IP de la impresora P nombre de la impresora o 1 ruta nombre de archivo c gt Ipr S nombre host de la impresora P nombre de la impresora o 1 ruta nombre de archivo Manual de software Operaciones especiales en Windows gt Imprimir archivos directamente desde Windows gt Comandos de impresi n gt ftp La sintaxis correcta para el domando ftp es la siguiente ftp gt put Wutalnombre del archivo opci n ftp gt mput ruta nombre del archivo ruta nombre del archivo Manual de software Operaciones especiales en Windows gt Imprimir arc
140. e sure to locate this machine in a large well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30 m hr person O When you use this machine for a long time in a confined space without good ventilation you may detect an odd smell To keep the workplace comfortable we recommend that you keep it well ventilated Environments to Avoid kimportant Areas exposed to direct sunlight or strong light O Dusty areas O Areas with corrosive gases O Areas that are excessively cold hot or humid O Areas directly exposed to currents of hot cold or room temperature air from air conditioners Areas directly exposed to radiant heat from heaters Locations near air conditioners heaters or humidifiers Locations near other electronic equipment I I I O Locations subject to frequent strong vibration Power Source Connect the power cable to a power source of the following specification 120V __ 120 V 60 Hz 10 A or more when fully equipped e 220 240V 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 5 A or more when fully equipped 15 Installing the Printer and Options Unpacking To protect it from shock and vibration during transit this printer comes pack aged in cushioning foam and secured with tape Remove these protective mate rials after bringing the printer to where it will be installed A WARNING Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers Toner dust might ig nite when exposed to an open flame Dispose of
141. e until printing starts To disable the Energy Saver mode select Off for Energy Saver Mode 2 using Smart Organizing Monitor It takes too much time to com plete the print job e Photographs and other data intensive pages take a long time for the printer to process so simply wait when print ing such data Changing the settings with printer driver may help to speed up printing See the printer driver Help e The data is so large or complex that takes time to process If the Ready indicator is blinking the data is being proc essed Just wait until it resumes e Ifthe Ready indicator on the control panel is flashing the printer is warming up Wait for a while Images are cut off or excess pages are printed If you are using paper smaller than the paper size selected in the application use the same size paper as that selected in the application If you cannot load paper of the correct size use the reduction function to reduce the image and then print See the printer driver Help 81 82 Troubleshooting Status Possible Causes Descriptions and Solutions Photo images are coarse Some applications lower the resolution for making prints Fine dot pattern does not print Change the Dithering setting in the printer driver s dialog box See the printer driver Help Solid lines are printed as broken lines Change the Dithering setting in the printer driver s
142. ear Cover If no paper open Front Cover and pull out Print Cartridge then remove any misfed paper There is a misfeed in the printer Outer jam Remove the misfed paper See p 90 Removing Jammed Paper from the Exit Area Du plex Unit Paper Misfeed Pull out the loaded paper from the indicated unit and then re move any misfed paper Bypass Tray If no paper open Front Cover and pull out Print Cartridge then remove any misfed paper There is a misfeed in the printer Bypass tray jam Remove the misfed paper See p 88 Removing Jammed Paper from the Bypass Tray Paper Misfeed Pull out the indicated unit and push Duplex Path Re lease Lever away Then re move any misfed paper Tray 1 There is a misfeed in the printer Duplex jam Remove the misfed paper See p 90 Removing Jammed Paper from the Exit Area Du plex Unit Error amp Status Messages on Smart Organizing Monitor Message Explanation Recommended Action Paper Misfeed There is a misfeed in the Remove the misfed paper Pull out the indicated unit printer See p 85 Removing Jammed and then remove any misfed Tray 2 jam Paper from the Inner Tray paper 1 Tray 2 Tray 2 Ifno paper open Front Cover and pull out Print Cartridge then remove any misfed paper Paper Size Mismatch The paper size setting in the Load paper of the selected size Paper of the s
143. ecificaties gt Hoofdeenheid Veiligheidsinformatie Wetten en voorschriften gt Laserveiligheid Dit product voldoet aan de volgende veiligheidsvoorschriften Dit apparaat voldoet aan de vereisten van IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 voor laserproducten van klasse 1 Softwarehandleiding Voorbereiden voor afdrukken gt Opties voor de printer instellen gt Wanneer bidirectionele communicatie is uitgeschakeld Wanneer Ondersteuning in twee richtingen inschakelen niet geselecteerd is kan Smart Organizing Monitor niet gebruikt worden Selecteer Ondersteuning in twee richtingen inschakelen om de software te gebruiken Softwarehandleiding Overige afdrukbewerkingen gt Wanneer er een fout optreedt met het opgegeven papierformaat en type Wanneer er een afdrukfout optreedt kunnen de instellingen niet veranderd worden met Smart Organizing Monitor Softwarehandleiding De printer controleren en configureren gt De Web Image Monitor gebruiken gt De systeeminformatie controleren gt De tellerinformatie controleren Toont het aantal dubbelzijdig afgedrukte vellen 13 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 14 of 32 Softwarehandleiding Geef 49999 niet naast 53550 op voor Poortnr onder De printer controleren en configureren gt De Instellingen netwerkafdrukken Web Image Monitor gebruiken gt Netwerkinstellingen configureren gt Instelli
144. ect tray 2 in the printer driver For details see the printer driver Help O If the optional paper feed unit is not installed properly reinstall it follow ing this procedure If you cannot install it properly even after attempting reinstallation contact your sales or service representative P Reference For loading paper into the paper tray see p 41 Loading Paper For printing the configuration page see Software Guide When adjusting the printing position see Software Guide 25 26 Installing the Printer and Options Network Connection Follow the procedure below to connect the printer to a computer through a net work Prepare the hub and other network devices before connecting the 10BASE T or 100BASE TX cable to the printer s Ethernet port A CAUTION Donotconnectthe Ethernet port of the printer to a network that may supply excess voltage such as a telephone line Doing so may result in fire or elec tric shock kimportant O Use shielded Ethernet cable Unshielded cables create electromagnetic inter ference that could cause malfunctions O The Ethernet cable is not supplied with this printer Select your cable accord ing to the network environment O Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port BXG026 2 Connect the cable to the network e g a network hub Reference For details about network environment settings see Software Guide For details about installing
145. ed using Auto Run Use Add Printer or Install Printer to install the printer driver For Windows 2000 O On the Start menu point to Settings and then click Printers 2 Double click the Add Printer icon 3 Follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 O On the Start menu click Printers and Faxes 2 Click Install Printer E Follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard For Windows XP Home Editions O On the Start menu click Control Panel 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware E Click Printers and Faxes 4 Click Install Printer B Follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard For Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 O On the Start menu click Control Panel 2 Click Printer in Hardware and Sound E click Add a printer O Follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard Making Option Settings for the Printer Making Option Settings for the Printer Make option settings for the printer using the printer driver when bidirectional communication is disabled Reference For details about making option settings for the printer see p 24 If Bidirec tional Communication Is Disabled Conditions for Bidirectional Communication Bidirectional communication allows information about paper settings to be automatically sent from the printer You can check printer status from your computer e Bidirec
146. ee p 57 Using Smart Organizing Monitor Cautions to Take When Using in a Network Cautions to Take When Using in a Network Using DHCP You can use this printer in a DHCP environment e Supported DHCP servers are those which are included with Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 e DHCP relay agent is not supported If you use DHCP relay agent on a network via ISDN it will result in increased line charges This is because your computer connects to the ISDN line whenever a packet is transferred from the printer e If there is more than one DHCP server use the same setting for all servers The printer operates using data from the DHCP server that responds first Using AutoNet If the printer s IPv4 address is not assigned by a DHCP server automatically a temporary IPv4 address starting with 169 254 which is not used on the network can be automatically selected by the printer If an AutoNet address is set as the printer s IP address it changes every time you turn on the printer Configure the TCP IP settings according to your network environment You must change this setting to on to use AutoNet Note O The IP address assigned by the DHCP server is given priority over that selected by AutoNet O You can confirm the current IPv4 address on the configuration page O The printer cannot communicate with devices that do not have the AutoNet function However this printer can communica
147. el gt Colocar papel na bandeja de alimenta o manual gt Colocar envelopes Envelopes com abas abertas devem ser impressos com as abas abertas e envelopes com abas fechadas devem ser impressos com as abas fechadas Antes de colocar envelopes confirme se est o devidamente lisos Guia de Hardware Anexo gt Especifica es gt Unidade principal Informa es de Seguran a Leis e Regulamentos gt Seguran a com o Laser Este produto cumpre com as seguintes normas de seguran a Este equipamento cumpre com os requisitos da norma TEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 para produtos laser de classe 1 Guia de Software Preparar para impress o gt Definir as op es para a impressora gt Se a comunica o bidireccional for desactivada Quando Activar suporte bidireccional n o estiver seleccionado n o poss vel utilizar Smart Organizing Monitor Seleccione Activar suporte bidireccional para utilizar o software Guia de Software Outras opera es de impress o gt Se ocorrerem erros com o formato e o tipo do papel especificado Quando ocorrer um erro de impress o n o poss vel alterar as defini es com o Smart Organizing Monitor Guia de Software Monitorizar e configurar a impressora gt Usar o Web Image Monitor gt Verificar a informa o de sistema gt Verificar a informa o do contador Apresenta o n mero total de folhas impressas em ambos os lados 17 Design Size A5 Pa
148. elected paper tray differs from that of actual in the tray and then change the size is not loaded in the indi paper size in the tray paper size setting with printer cated paper source tray driver Check the indicated tray Bypass Tray Paper Size Mismatch The paper size setting in the Load paper of the selected size Paper of the selected paper tray differs from that of actual in the tray and then change the size is not loaded in the indi paper size in the tray paper size setting with Smart cated paper source tray Organizing Monitor Check the indicated tray Perform one of the following Tray 1 or Tray 2 procedures if there is a print job queued for processing e Cancel the print job by pressing the Job Reset key e Apply form feed by press ing the Stop Start key e Change the paper settings in Web Image Monitor and continue printing For details see Form Feed Software Guide Paper Size Mismatch 2 sided printing could not be Specify the tray containing the Paper of the selected paper performed because the tray A4 Letter or Legal size paper in size is not supported for the does not contain the valid size the printer driver setting Duplex feature paper which are A4 Letter or See Software Guide Legal Paper Type Mismatch The paper type setting in the Load paper of the selected type Paper of the selected type is tray differs from that of actual in the tray and t
149. else i bakken og skift derefter indstillinger for papirst rrelsen med Smart Organizing Monitor Softwarevejledning I Bem rk Andre _udskrivningsfunktioner gt Setvis Hvis der bruges Automatisk forts t til det f rste sat annulleres Seetvis udskrivning ar udskrivning Hvis der er arkfgdning p det f rste s t vil Samordning blive annulleret Reference Du kan finde flere oplysninger om udskrivningsmetode i hj lpen til printerdriveren 10 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 11 of 32 je Notas para los usuarios 1 A Estas notas ofrecen informaci n adicional sobre el uso del producto y erratas en las explicaciones de las instrucciones Asunto Correcci n Manual de hardware Conexi n de la impresora gt Conexi n de red Gu a de instalaci n de software para conexi n en red 1 Impresi n de una p gina de prueba Es necesario realizar el siguiente procedimiento despu s del paso 1 en el Manual de Hardware y antes del paso 1 en la Gu a de instalaci n de software para conexi n en red Cuando haya completado este procedimiento contin e en el paso siguiente de cada manual Usuarios de la UE IN PRECAUCI N Hay que utilizar conectores y cables debidamente apantallados y conectados a tierra para las conexiones con el ordenador host y o perif ricos para cumplir los l mites de emisiones Usuarios de los EE UU PREC
150. emoving a paper jam or replacing toner If your skin comes into contact with toner wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and water Iftoner gets on your clothing wash with cold water Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible Iftoner or used toner gets into your eyes flush thoroughly with eyewash or water Consult a doctor if necessary Iftoneror used toner is swallowed dilute by drinking a large amount of water Consult a doctor if necessary The inside of this machine becomes very hot Do not touch parts labelled A indicating a hot surface Elmportant O Store print cartridges in a cool dark place O Actual printable numbers vary depending on image volume and density number of pages printed at a time paper type and size and environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity Toner quality degrades over time Early replacement of the print cartridge might be necessary Therefore we recommend you always keep a new print cartridge ready O For good print quality the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier O The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products 59 Replacing Consumables When to replace the print cartridge If the Alert indicator or Replace Print Cartridge indicator on the
151. en Sie sie so ein wie sie in der Packung liegen also je nachdem entweder mit ge ffneten oder geschlossenen Laschen Hardware Anleitung Anhang gt Technische Daten gt Hauptger t Sicherheitshinweise Gesetze und Auflagen gt Sicherheitslaser Dieses Produkt erf llt die folgenden Sicherheitsstandards Dieses Ger t erf llt die Anforderungen der TEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 f r Laser Produkte der Klasse 1 Software Anleitung Vorbereitung zum Drucken gt Vornehmen von Optionseinstellungen f r den Drucker gt Wenn die bidirektionale Kommunikation deaktiviert ist Wenn Bidirektionale Unterst tzung aktivieren nicht gew hlt ist kann Smart Organizing Monitor nicht verwendet werden W hlen Sie Bidirektionale Unterst tzung aktivieren aus um die Software zu verwenden Software Anleitung Sonstige Druckvorg nge gt Falls Fehler bei dem festgelegten Papiertyp und Papierformat auftreten Wenn ein Druckfehler auftritt k nnen die Einstellungen nicht mit Smart Organizing Monitor ge ndert werden Software Anleitung berwachen und Konfigurieren des Druckers gt Verwenden des Web Image Monitor gt berpr fen der Systeminformationen gt berpr fen der Z hlerinformationen Zeigt die Gesamtanzahl an beidseitig bedruckten Bl ttern Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 4 of 32 li Software Anleitung Uberwachen und Konf
152. ent select Run as Admin istrator to start Smart Organizing Monitor Click IP Address and then enter the printer s MAC ad dress that was printed on the test page ex 00 11 22 aa bb cc in the MAC Address box In the IP Address box enter the IP address you want to set for the printer Click OK twice and then click Close Installing the Printer Driver On the Printer Drivers and Utilities dialog box click the name of the printer driver you want to install After reading the agreement click I accept the agree ment and then click Next gt Select the Search for network printers check box and then click Next gt When the list of found printers appears click this printer and then click Next gt If necessary double click the printer to display and con figure its settings and then click Continue If a message appears informing you that the installation was successfully completed click Finish Note If the IP address setting or the printer search fails please make sure the printer is connected to the same network segment as the PC Dieses Handbuch liefert eine kurze Beschreibung des Verfahrens fur die Installation des Druckertreibers in der Netzwerkumgebung Falls Sie diesen Drucker mit dem USB Kabel verwenden finden Sie weitere Informationen zur Installation des Druckertreibers unter Software Anleitung Lesen Sie bitte fur die korrekte Verwendung die Kurzanleit
153. er le produit et n h sitez pas vous y reporter ult rieurement Pour exploiter pleinement les fonctionnalit s du p riph rique et I utiliser dans les meilleures conditions de s curit possibles lisez Consignes de s curit avant de vous en servir Ce manuel d crit bri vement la proc dure suivre pour installer le p riph rique Pour plus de d tails sur l installation et d autres informations reportez vous au Manuel du mat riel sur le CD ROM BXG014 BXG018 Leggere attentamente il presente manuale prima di utilizzare il prodotto e tenerlo a portata di mano per riferimenti futuri Per un utilizzo corretto e sicuro leggere le Informazioni sulla sicurezza prima di usare la periferica f Il presente manuale descrive brevemente la procedura di installazione della periferica Per maggiori dettagli sull installazione e per altre informazioni vedere la Guida per l hardware all interno del CD ROM 8xG007 BXG201 Lea este manual atentamente antes de usar el producto y gu rdelo en un lugar a mano para poder consultarlo en el futuro Para hacer un uso correcto y seguro de la m quina lea el apartado Informaci n de seguridad antes de utilizar la m quina Este manual describe las instrucciones para instalar esta m quina Para obtener m s detalles sobre la instalaci n e informaci n adicional consulte el Manual de hardware en el CD ROM lt Power Source e 120 V 60 Hz 10 A or more 220 240 V 50 60
154. er the test printing click this button to set the IP address manually 9 Note For details about test printing see the printer operating instructions Printer Configuration Printer Configuration Paper Input Tab Make paper settings such as size and type for each paper tray Tray 1 Paper Size In the Paper Size list select the size of paper loaded in the input tray When Custom Paper Size is selected specify one of the sizes below Paper Type In the Paper Type list select the paper type Custom Paper Size Enter the custom paper size when Custom Paper Size is selected e Unit Select which units mm or inch to use for entering lengths in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes e Horizontal Vertical Enter the custom paper size when Custom Paper Size is selected In the units selected earlier mm or inch enter the length of the paper s short and long edges in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes respectively 9 Note Available paper sizes vary depending on the paper tray For details about set ting the paper size see the printer operating instructions Tray 2 Paper Size In the Paper Size list select the size of paper loaded in the input tray Paper Type In the Paper Type list select the paper type 9 Note Available paper sizes vary depending on the paper tray For details about set ting the paper size see the printer operating instructions Using Smart Organizing Monitor under the Ma
155. ers Paper Jam Select to send an alert e mail to the specified address ifa paper jam occurs No Paper Select to send an alert e mail to the specified address if paper runs out Toner Cartridge Low Select to send an alert e mail to the specified address if toner becomes low Service Required Select to send an alert e mail to the specified address if the printer requires servicing Toner Cartridge End Select to send an alert e mail to the specified address if toner runs out Cover Open Select to send an alert e mail to the specified address if a cover is open 48 Using Web Image Monitor Configuring the SNMP Settings Click the SNMP tab on the network settings page to configure the SNMP settings SNMP Setting Item Description SNMP Select whether to enable the printer to use SNMP services Trap Item Description Target Trap Select whether to enable the printer to send traps to the management host NMS SNMP Management Host 1 Enter the IP address or host name of a manage ment host Can contain up to 32 characters SNMP Management Host 2 Enter the IP address or host name of a manage ment host Can contain up to 32 characters Community Item Description Get Community Enter the community name to use for authen tication of Get requests Can contain up to 32 characters To search for this printer in Smart Organizing Mo
156. esti suojattu ja maadoitettu jotta pysyt n s teilylle asetetuissa rajoissa K ytt j t USA ssa T RKE Is nt koneiden lis laitteiden k ytettyjen ja tai yhteyksiin maadoitettu jotta pysyt n FCC n s teilylle asettamissa rajoissa Kaikki k ytt j t A Ethernet kaapeliin liitett v ferriittiydin toimitetaan laitteen mukana Tee kaapeliin silmukka noin 5 cm p h n laitteesta O Liit ferriittiydin B Liit Ethernet kaapeli laitteen takaosassa olevaan Ethernet porttiin Liit kaapeli ferriittiytimen kanssa tulostimeen C Liit kaapelin toinen p verkkoon esimerkiksi k ytt m ll jakajaa Laitteisto opas Paperi ja muut tulostusmateriaalit gt Paperisuositukset gt Paperin asettaminen Kun olen lis nnyt paperia paperikasettiin muista aina asettaa paperin tyyppi ja koko k ytt m ll Smart Organizing Monitoria tai Web Image Monitoria Jos tulostimen ja tulostinohjaimen asetukset eiv t t sm tulosteet saattavat tulostua v rin Laitteisto opas Paperi ja muut tulostusmateriaalit gt Paperin asettaminen gt Paperin asettaminen ohisy tt tasoon gt Kirjekuorien asettaminen Kirjekuoret jotka tulevat pakkauksesta l p t auki asetetaan tulostimeen l p t auki Kirjekuoret jotka tulevat pakkauksesta l p t kiinni asetetaan tulostimeen l p t kiinni Varmista ett kirjekuoret ovat mahdollisimman litteit ennen kuin asetat ne tulostimeen Laitteisto op
157. ferences dialog box may vary depending on the application For details see the manuals provided with the application you use O Any settings you make in the procedure above are valid for the current application only O General users can change the properties displayed in the Print dialog box of an application Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from this application P Reference For details about settings see the printer driver Help Accessing the Printer Properties Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Making Printer Settings Making the printer default settings the Printer window iitimportant O To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default O You cannot change the printer default settings for each user Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users O On the Start menu click Control Panel The Control Panel window appears 2 Click Printer in Hardware and Sound 6 Right click the icon of the printer you want to use and then click Proper ties The printer properties dialog box appears 4 Make the necessary settings and then click OK 9 Note O Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications P Reference For details abou
158. forma es da impressora no Smart Organizing Monitor podem n o ser atualizadas corretamente A sintaxe correta para o comando Ipr a seguinte c gt lpr S endere o IP da impressora P nome da impressora o 1 caminho nome do arquivo c gt Ipr S nome do host da impressora P nome da impressora o 1 Guia de Software Opera es especiais no Windows gt Imprimir arquivos diretamente a partir do Windows gt Comandos de impress o gt ftp caminho nome do arquivo A sintaxe correta para o comando ftp a seguinte ftp gt put caminho nome do arquivo op o ftp gt mput caminho nome do arquivo caminho nome do arquivo Guia de Software Opera es especiais no Windows gt Imprimir arquivos diretamente a partir do Windows gt Comandos de impress o gt ftp User e Password para a transfer ncia de dados por ftp foram fixados como sysadm Para transferir dados por ftp digite sysadm T pico Erro Corre o Guia de Hardware Instalar a impressora e opcionais gt Instalar a impressora gt Desembalar Guia de Instala o R pida 2 Desembalar 5 Remova os materiais de prote o colocados no interior da impressora 5 Remova os materiais de prote o colocados no interior da impressora BxGo14 As seguintes descri es n o se aplicam a este equipamento T pico Erro Guia de Hardware Conectar a Impressora gt Conex o de
159. g Monitor Legen Sie das f r das Magazin ausgew hlte Papierformat ein oder ndern Sie die Papierformateinstellung mit Smart Organizing Monitor Software Anleitung Sonstige Druckvorg nge gt Sortieren 9 Hinweis Wenn Automatisch Fortsetzen beim ersten Satz angewendet wird wird Sortieren abgebrochen Wenn ein Seitenvorschub beim ersten Satz angewendet wird wird Sortieren abgebrochen Referenz Weitere Informationen zum Druckverfahren finden Sie in der Hilfe zum Druckertreiber 4 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 5 of 32 Remarques a l attention des utilisateurs E A Ces remarques contiennent des informations compl mentaires sur l utilisation de ce produit et valent pour errata des manuels utilisateur Sujet Correction Manuel du mat riel Connexion de l imprimante gt Connexion r seau Guide d installation du logiciel pour une connexion r seau 1 Impression d une page de test La proc dure ci apr s est requise apr s l tape 1 du Manuel du mat riel et avant l tape 1 du Guide d installation du logiciel pour une connexion r seau Une fois cette proc dure r alis e passez l tape suivante du manuel concern Utilisateurs de l UE ATTENTION Il est n cessaire d utiliser des c bles et des connecteurs correctement blind s et mis la terre pour les connexions un ordinateur h te et ou
160. g Smart Organizing Monitor System Displays the system information about the printer such as the model name system version memory size and printer language Counter Displays information about the counter Network Displays network details such as the printer s IP address and network related comments Reference For details about what you can perform on each tab in the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box see Smart Organizing Monitor Help Printing the printer configurations On the User Tools tab you can print lists of printer information Elmportant I You can print the configuration page only when the printer is not busy processing jobs O To use this function the printer must be monitored from Smart Organizing Monitor via a supported printer driver In the List Test Print list select the item you want to print You can print the following lt Configuration Page The current configurations and general information of the printer are printed PCL Config Font Page The installed PCL font list is printed lt PS Config Font Page The installed PS font list is printed Use the printed configuration page to check the information such as general information and printer configuration The procedure for printing the configuration page is described as an example O On the User Tools tab in the List Test Print list select Configuration Page B click Print The configuration page is pr
161. gt c gt lpr S nyomtat gazdag p cime P nyomtat n v o 1 v Nyomtat si parancsok gt Ipr Szoftver tmutat Az ftp parancsot a k vetkez k ppen adja meg ftp gt put utvonal fajln v opci Speci lis m veletek Windows alatt gt F jlok nyomtat sa k zvetlen l Windowsb l gt Nyomtat si parancsok gt ftp nyomtat sa k zvetlen l Windowsb l gt ftp gt mput tvonal f jlnev tvonal f jlnev Nyomtat si parancsok gt ftp Szoftver tmutat Az ftp szerveren t rt n adat tvitelhez sziiks ges User s a Password r gzitett be llit sa sysadm Az ftp szerveren t rt n adat tvitelhez irja be a sysadm sz t Temak r Hiba Helyesbites Hardver tmutat A nyomtat s a kieg sz t k telep t se gt A nyomtat telep t se gt Kicsomagol s Gyors telepitesi tmutat 2 Kicsomagol s 5 T vol tsa el a nyomtat belsej re er s tett ved anyagokat 5 T volitsa el a nyomtat belsej re er s tett ved anyagokat BXGOIS A k vetkez leir sok nem alkalmazhat k ehhez a k sziil kez kapcsolatos javaslatok gt Papirtipusok s mas hordoz k gt Pap rt pusok Hardver tmutat Papir s egy b hordoz k gt Pap r bet lt se gt Pap r bet lt se a k zi adagol ba gt Borit k bet lt se Temak r Hiba Hardver tmutat A nyomtat csatlakoztat sa gt H l zati FkFontos kapcsolat Arny
162. gt ftp A sintaxe correcta para o comando ftp a seguinte ftp gt put caminho nome do ficheiro op o ftp gt mput caminho nome do ficheiro caminho nome do ficheiro Guia de Software Opera es especiais no Windows gt Imprimir ficheiros directamente a partir do Windows gt Comandos de impress o gt ftp User e Password para a transfer ncia de dados por ftp est o fixos como sysadm Para transferir dados por ftp introduza sysadm T pico Erro Correc o Guia de Hardware Instalar a impressora e opcionais gt Instalar a impressora gt Desembalar Guia de Instala o R pida 2 Desembalar 5 Remova os materiais de protec o colocados no interior da impressora 5 Remova os materiais de protec o colocados no interior da impressora BxGo14 As seguintes descri es n o se aplicam a este equipamento T pico Erro Guia de Hardware Ligar a Impressora gt Liga o de rede Atimportante Utilize cabos Ethernet blindados Os cabos n o blindados criam interfer ncia electromagn tica que pode causar avarias Guia de Hardware Papel e outros suportes gt Recomenda es de Papel gt Tipos de Papel e Outros Suportes de Impress o gt Tipos de papel Guia de Hardware Papel e outros suportes gt Colocar papel gt Colocar papel na bandeja de alimenta o manual gt Colocar envelopes Evite utilizar envelopes autocolantes Podem provoca
163. he Yes check box to configure the printer as default 14 Specify whether or not to share this printer and then click Next gt 15 Specify whether or not to print a test page and then click Next gt D Click Finish The printer driver installation starts 9 Note O When you click Finish the Digital Signature Not Found dialog box may appear To continue the installation click Yes O Auto Run might not work under certain operating system settings If this is the case launch Setup exe from the CD ROM root directory O The printer driver in the selected language will be installed O To stop the selected software installation click Cancel before the installa tion is complete P Reference For details about checking the printer s IP address see p 8 Printing a test page For details about reconfiguring the printer settings when the network printer search fails see p 12 If the network printer search fails Installing the Printer Driver in a Network Environment Installing the Printer Driver to Use As a Windows Network Printer This section explains how to install the printer driver for using this printer as a Windows network printer ditimportant O Before you can make the following settings you must configure this printer as a Windows network printer For details about configuring a Windows network printer see p 73 Using a Print Server The following example procedure explains
164. he Power ON nenne a een 21 Installing the Optional Paper Feed Unit uuunnsensssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 23 3 Connecting the Printer Network Connection catala re eater 27 Reading the LED Eamps i iaia dalia ai 28 USB GOnnecHion za Er ee 29 4 Paper and Other Media Supported Paper for Each Tray rreeceee eee iii 31 Paper RecommendallOnS iii 33 Loading Papua iii kn iaia aa 33 Storing Paper siii tia iii iii iva 33 Types of Paper and Other Media ii 34 Paper Not Supported by This Printer errar 38 Print AIG a s stewie reinen em Alien ae 39 Loading Pape lane nee 41 Loading Paper in Wray Vis htc eee ee Steel lane 41 LEoading Paper iN Tray 2 2 2 eek elegant 50 Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray i 53 5 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Print Cartridge ccccsssseccssseeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeenseeeeeensseeeeesseneeeees 59 6 Cleaning the Printer Cautions to Take When CleaningQ rin 65 Cleaning the Friction Pad and the Paper Feed Roller 66 7 Troubleshooting Error amp Status Messages on Smart Organizing Monitor 69 PanetIndicatof gt rallo 74 Printer Does Not Print dia 75 When the Printer is Directly Connected to a Computer via USB Cable 76 Other Printing PrODlemMS on ta 79 Additional Troublesho
165. he network connection IPP Printer Name Shows the name used to identify the printer on the network Network Version Shows the version of the printer s network module a part of the printer firmware MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the printer lt TCP IP Status Item Description DHCP Select whether the printer should receive a dynamic IP address automatically using DHCP To use DHCP select Enable When enabled the items below cannot be configured IP Address Enter the IP address for the printer Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the network Gateway Enter the IP address of the network gateway 45 46 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Configuring the Network Application Settings Click the Network Application tab on the network settings page to configure the network application settings Network Print Settings Item Description IPP Select to enable network printing using Internet Print Protocol via TCP port 631 80 FTP Select to enable network printing using an embedded FTP server in the printer via TCP port 20 21 RAW Select to enable network raw printing Port Enter the TCP port number to use for raw printing The valid range is 1024 to 65535 except 53550 default is 9100 LPR Select to enable network printing using LPR LPD via TCP port 515 mDNS Setting Item Description mDNS
166. he optional paper feed unit is attached to the printer Adjusting registrations On the Maintenance tab you can adjust print starting positions Normally you do not have to adjust registrations However adjustments could be useful in some cases especially when you want to print in a specific position Under Registration Tray 1 Registration Tray 2 Registration Bypass Tray and Registration Duplex Tray you can adjust the print image position printed on the sheet fed from each tray To check the adjustment result use Print Test Sheet Using Smart Organizing Monitor Setting basic functions On the System tab you can set basic functions required to use the printer The printer can be used on factory set defaults but the configuration can be changed depending on the condition of the user The changed condition holds even if the printer is turned off The access code can be changed on this tab Making network related settings On the Network 1 Network 2 and Network 3 tabs you can set configurations about network connection and communication The following operations are possible on these tabs e Checking the printer name active protocol and other printer information e Making interface settings including the timeout setting and protocol settings e Checking or making TCP IP settings e Checking or making SMTP settings e Checking or making SNMP and Alert settings Settings conditions for printing
167. hen change the not loaded in the indicated Paper type in the tray paper type setting with printer paper source tray driver Check the indicated tray Bypass Tray 7 72 Troubleshooting Message Explanation Recommended Action Paper Type Mismatch Paper of the selected type is not loaded in the indicated paper source tray Check the indicated tray Tray 1 or Tray 2 The paper type setting in the tray differs from that of actual paper type in the tray Load paper of the selected type in the tray and then change the paper type setting with Smart Organizing Monitor Perform one of the following procedures if there is a printjob queued for processing e Cancel the print job by pressing the Job Reset key e Apply form feed by press ing the Stop Start key e Change the paper settings in Web Image Monitor and continue printing For details see Form Feed Software Guide Paper Type Mismatch Paper of the selected paper type is not supported for the Duplex feature You cannot select duplex printing if the paper type is set to Thick Paper 2 Bond paper Cardstock Labels OHP or Envelope Select a paper type that allows duplex printing See p 34 Types of paper Print Cartridge is near empty The print cartridge is almost empty Prepare a new print cartridge Printing has been interrupt ed because of the memory overflo
168. her countries Citrix is a registered trademark of Citrix Systems Inc PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Toravalds in the U S and other counties UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group Monotype is a registered trademark of Monotype Imaging Inc IPS is a trademark or registered trademark of Zoran Corporation and or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights in those marks The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server The product names of Windows XP are as follows Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition The product names of Windows Vista are as follows Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Microsoft Windows Vista Business Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Web Edition Mi
169. his tray can hold up to 250 sheets of plain paper 8 Bypass Tray Extension Pull this out when loading a sheet that is longer than A4 SEF on the Bypass Tray 9 Bypass Tray This tray can hold up to 50 sheets of plain paper Guide to the Printer Exterior Rear View 1 Ethernet Port Use a network interface cable to connect the printer to the network 2 USB Port Use a USB cable to connect the printer to the host computer 3 Rear Cover Open this cover to remove jammed paper or when printing on envelopes BXG004 4 Tray 1 Rear cover Remove this cover when you load paper larger than A4 in the paper tray 5 Power Socket For connecting the power cord to the printer Interior Interior BXG005 1 Print Cartridge If a toner end indicator on the control panel lights up replace the print car tridge P Reference For details about the messages that appear on the screen when consumables need to be replaced see p 69 Error amp Status Messages on Smart Organizing Monitor 11 12 Guide to the Printer Control Panel Stop Start Job Reset 1 Stop Start key If you press this key the printer stops re ceiving data and printing is not possible Press the Stop Start key again to return to the ready condition You can also use this key to print the con figuration page To print the configura tion page turn the printer off and then while pressing and holding this key
170. hivos directamente desde Windows gt Comandos de impresi n gt ftp Tanto el User como la Password para transferir datos mediante ftp se han fijado en sysadm Para transferir datos mediante ftp introduzca sysadm Asunto Correcci n Error Manual de hardware Instalaci n de la impresora y las opciones gt Instalaci n de la impresora gt Desembalaje Gu a de Instalaci n R pida 2 Desembalaje 5 Retire el material protector colocado en el interior de la impresora 5 Retire el material protector colocado en el interior de la impresora BxGo14 Las siguientes descripciones no se aplican a esta m quina Asunto Error Manual de hardware Conexi n de la impresora gt Conexi n de red WE importante Utilice un cable Ethernet protegido Los cables no protegidos crean interferencias electromagn ticas que pueden provocar un funcionamiento incorrecto Manual de hardware Papel y otros soportes gt Recomendaciones acerca del papel gt Tipos de papel y otros soportes gt Tipos de papel Manual de hardware Papel y otros soportes gt Carga del papel gt Carga de papel en la bandeja bypass gt Carga de sobres No utilice sobres autoadhesivos Podr an impedir el funcionamiento correcto de la impresora Manual de hardware Detecci n de errores gt Mensajes de error y estado en Smart Organizing Monitor Cargue papel del tama o seleccionado en la bandeja y des
171. i n de una contrase a consulte la secci n de Ayuda de Web Image Monitor o Smart Organizing Monitor Nota para o Administrador O presente manual destina se a fornecer aos administradores informa es adicionais sobre as fun es de seguran a desta impressora Leia este manual bem como o Guia de Software O presente manual e o respectivo conte do deve ser mantido responsabilidade exclusiva dos administradores Palavra passe Ao iniciar a sess o nesta impressora ser lhe solicitada a introdu o da palavra passe ou c digo de acesso Recomendamos vivamente que altere imediatamente a palavra passe ou o c digo de acesso predefinido de f brica para evitar a fuga de informa o e opera es n o autorizadas por outras pessoas Ser lhe solicitada a introdu o da sua palavra passe ou c digo de acesso quando tentar fazer uma das seguintes opera es O Alterar as defini es da impressora atrav s do Web Image Monitor O Alterar as defini es da impressora do administrador atrav s do Smart Organizing Monitor Para utilizar a palavra passe ou c digo de acesso predefinido de f brica deixe o campo da palavra passe em branco quando utilizar o Web Image Monitor Ao utilizar o Smart Organizing Monitor introduza Admin como c digo de acesso Para alterar a palavra passe para o Web Image Monitor e o Smart Organizing Monitor precisa de iniciar a sess o como Administrador e de seguida efectuar as altera
172. ia de Software Outras opera es de impress o gt Se ocorrerem erros com o formato e o tipo do papel especificado Quando ocorre um erro de impress o n o poss vel alterar as configura es com o Smart Organizing Monitor Guia de Software Monitorar e configurar a impressora gt Usar o Web Image Monitor gt Verificar a informa o de sistema gt Verificar a informa o do contador Mostra o n mero total de folhas impressas em ambos os lados Guia de Software Monitorar e configurar a impressora gt Usar o Web Image Monitor gt Configurar as defini es de rede gt Configurar as defini es de aplica o de rede N o especifique 49999 juntamente com 53550 para Porta No em Defini es de Impress o da Rede 31 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 32 of 32 li Guia de Software Monitorar e configurar a impressora gt Usar o Web Image Monitor gt Configurar as defini es de rede gt Configurar as defini es DNS E poss vel especificar um n mero entre e 999 para Limite de tempo do DNS segundos Guia de Software Monitorar e configurar a impressora gt Usando o Smart Organizing Monitor gt Ver o estado da impressora Guia de Software Opera es especiais no Windows gt Imprimir arquivos diretamente a partir do Windows gt Comandos de impress o gt lpr Ao imprimir via conex o USB as in
173. ick Con trol Panel on the Start menu and then click Printer The Printer window appears 2 Click the icon of the printer you want to use El on the File menu click Properties 4 Click the Accessories tab 5 Select options installed from the Options area g Click the Paper Size Settings tab 7 Select and highlight the tray to be used select the appropriate size and then click Update g Click OK to close the printer properties dialog box ES Ra 2 Setting Up the Printer Driver Accessing the Printer Properties This section explains about accessing the printer properties and make the printer settings The procedure explained in this chapter applies to both the PCL 6 and PostScript 3 printer drivers Windows 2000 Making Printer Settings Making the printer default settings the Printer window Elmportant O To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default O You cannot change the printer default settings for each user Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users O On the Start menu point to Settings and then click Printers The Printers window appears 2 Click the icon of the printer you want to use El on the File menu click Properties The printer propert
174. ies dialog box appears 4 Make the necessary settings and then click OK 9 Note O Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications P Reference For details about settings see the printer driver Help 20 26 Setting Up the Printer Driver Making the printer default settings Printing Preferences Elmportant O You cannot change the printer default settings for each user Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users O On the Start menu point to Settings and then click Printers The Printers window appears 2 Click the icon of the printer you want to use E On the File menu click Printing Preferences The Printing Preferences dialog box appears 4 Make the necessary settings and then click OK 9 Note O Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications P Reference For details about settings see the printer driver Help Making printer settings from an application You can make printer settings for a specific application To make printer settings for a specific application open the Printing Preferences dialog box from that application The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000 1 On the File menu click Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Select the printer you want to use in the Select Printer list E Make the necessary settings
175. igurieren des Druckers gt Verwenden des Web Image Monitor gt Konfigurieren der Netzwerkeinstellungen gt Konfigurieren der Einstellungen der Netzwerkanwendung Legen Sie nicht 49999 zus tzlich zu 53550 f r Anschluss Nr unter Netzwerk Druck Einstellungen fest Software Anleitung Uberwachen und Konfigurieren des Druckers gt Verwenden des Web Image Monitor gt Konfigurieren der Netzwerkeinstellungen gt Konfigurieren der DNS Einstellung Eine Zahl zwischen 1 und 999 kann fiir DNS Timeout Sekunden angegeben werden Software Anleitung Uberwachen und Konfigurieren des Druckers gt Verwenden des Smart Organizing Monitor gt Druckerstatus anzeigen Wenn Sie iiber eine USB Verbindung drucken werden die Druckerinformationen im Smart Organizing Monitor eventuell nicht korrekt aktualisiert Software Anleitung Spezielle Funktionsvorg nge unter Windows gt Dateien direkt unter Windows drucken gt Druckbefehle gt Ipr Die korrekte Syntax f r den Ipr Befehl lautet wie folgt c gt lpr S IP Adresse des Druckers P Druckername o I Pfad Dateiname c gt Ipr S Drucker Hostname P Druckername o 1 Pfad Dateiname Software Anleitung Spezielle Funktionsvorg nge unter Windows gt Dateien direkt unter Windows drucken gt Druckbefehle gt ftp Die korrekte Syntax f r den ftp Befehl lautet wie folgt ftp gt put Pfad Dateiname Option ftp gt mput Pfad Dateiname Pfad Dateiname Softwar
176. ilote d impression Remarque Silimprimante obtient automatiquement son adresse IP partir d un serveur DHCP vous n avez pas besoin d effectuer 2 Installation de Smart Organizing Monitor et 3 Sp cification de l adresse IP de l imprimante Impression d une page de test Connectez l imprimante et l ordinateur avec un cable Ethernet Tout en appuyant sur la touche R initialiser travail mettez l imprimante sous tension puis maintenez la touche enfonc e jusqu ce que le voyant Alerte commence clignoter Limpression commence environ 30 secondes apr s que le voyant Alerte commence clignoter V rifiez l adresse IP de l imprimante partir de la page de test imprim e R f rence Vous pouvez galement utiliser Web Image Monitor pour modifier l adresse IP obtenue partir d un serveur DHCP Pour acc der Web Image Monitor utilisez l adresse IP imprim e sur la page de test Pour plus d informations sur Web Image Monitor reportez vous au Manuel du logiciel Installation de Smart Organizing Monitor Quittez toutes les applications ouvertes Ins rez le CD ROM dans le lecteur de CD ROM S lectionnez la langue de interface puis cliquez sur OK Cliquez sur Smart Organizing Monitor S lectionnez une langue pour le programme d installation de Smart Organizing Monitor puis cliquez sur Suivant gt Cliquez sur Suivant gt Apr s avoir lu le co
177. ina di prova Riferimento possibile utilizzare il Web Image Monitor per modificare l indirizzo IP ottenuto dal server DHCP Per accedere al Web Image Monitor utilizzare l indirizzo IP stampato sulla pagina di prova Per ulteriori informazioni sul Web Image Monitor vedere la Guida software Installazione dello Smart Organizing Monitor Chiudere tutte le applicazioni in esecuzione Inserire il CD ROM nell apposita unit Selezionare una lingua per l interfaccia e fare clic su OK Fare clic su Smart Organizing Monitor Selezionare una lingua per il programma di installazione dello Smart Organizing Monitor e fare clic su Avanti gt Fare clic su Avanti gt Una volta letto il contratto fare clic su S Fare clic su Avanti gt due volte Fare clic su Fine Inserimento dell indirizzo IP della stampante Per avviare lo Smart Organizing Monitor nel menu Start selezionare Tutti i programmi gt Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series gt Stato di Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series Nota In Windows Vista selezionare Esegui come amministratore per avviare lo Smart Organizing Monitor Fare clic su Indirizzo IP e inserire l indirizzo MAC della stampante presente sulla pagina di prova es 00 11 22 aa bb cc nella casella Indirizzo MAC Inserire l indirizzo IP desiderato per la stampante nella casella Indirizzo IP Fare clic su OK due volte
178. ine automatically enters Energy Saver mode 2 1 minute after the last operation is completed Specifications Energy Saver mode 1 Power Consumption 70 W or less Default Time Off Recovery Time 10 seconds or less Energy Saver mode 2 Power Consumption 5 W or less Default Time 1 minute Recovery Time 20 seconds or less 9 Note O For details about how to configure Energy Saver mode see Using Smart Organizing Monitor Software Guide in the CD ROM Reference Using Smart Organizing Monitor Software Guide in the CD ROM Recycled Paper We recommend you to use environmentally friendly recycled paper Please contact your sales representative for recommended paper A gt La S AN RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 10 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM Environmental Features Type 2 Model ENERGY STAR Program ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment ENERGY STAR The ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment encourages energy con servation by promoting energy efficient computers and other office equipment The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving functions It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily Targeted products are computers monitors printers facsimiles copiers scanners and multi function devices Energy Star standa
179. ing it at a slant can damage the printer O Fan the paper thoroughly before loading it in the paper tray 1 Carefully pull tray 1 and then pull out with both hands BXG031 Place the tray on a flat surface 41 Paper and Other Media 2 Pinch the clip on the side paper guide and slide it to match the standard size BXG032 DAG BXG104 When loading custom size paper position the paper guide slightly wider than the actual paper size E Pinch the end paper guide and slide it inward to match the standard size BXG105 42 Loading Paper BXG106 When loading custom size paper position the paper guide slightly wider than the actual paper size O Load the new paper stack print side down Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit marked inside the tray BXG036 Slide the guides inward until they are flush against the paper s sides Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the projection on the side paper guides BSP065S 43 Paper and Other Media B Check there are no gaps between the paper and the paper guides both side and end paper guides BXG109 If there is a gap between the paper and the end paper guide as in the example 4 below the paper might not feed in correctly BXG108 g Carefully push tray 1 straight into the printer BXG040 To avoid paper jams make sure the t
180. ingen aanbrengen E Verwijzing Voor meer informatie over wachtwoorden instellen raadpleeg Web Image Monitor of Smart Organizing Monitor Help Nota ao Administrador O presente manual destina se a fornecer aos administradores informa es adicionais sobre as fun es de seguran a desta impressora Leia este manual bem como o Guia de Software O presente manual e o respectivo conte do deve ser mantido a responsabilidade exclusiva dos administradores Senha Ao iniciar a sess o na impressora voc ser solicitado a inserir sua senha ou seu c digo de acesso Recomendamos enfaticamente que voc altere a senha ou o c digo de acesso padr o de f brica para evitar vazamento de informa es e a realiza o de opera es n o autorizadas por terceiros Sua senha ou seu c digo de acesso ser solicitado quando voc tentar realizar qualquer uma das seguintes opera es O Alterar as defini es da impressora atrav s do Web Image Monitor O Alterar as defini es da impressora do administrador atrav s do Smart Organizing Monitor Para usar a senha ou o c digo de acesso padr o de f brica deixe o campo Senha em branco ao utilizar o Web Image Monitor Ao usar o Smart Organizing Monitor digite Admin como c digo de acesso Para alterar a senha para o Web Image Monitor e o Smart Organizing Monitor preciso iniciar a sess o como Administrador e em seguida fazer as altera es necess rias D Refer nci
181. ings of this printer See p 34 Types of Paper and Other Media e Check the paper settings of the printer driver See the printer driver Help The toner has run out and print ing has stopped When the toner runs out pressing the Stop Start key allows you to print a few more pages but the print quality of those pages cannot be guaranteed Printed envelopes come out creased Check if the green levers found inside the rear cover are properly set If the problem cannot be solved contact your sales or service representative Additional Troubleshooting Additional Troubleshooting Problems Solutions Strange noise is heard If a supply was recently replaced or an option in the area the strange noise is coming from check the supply or option is properly attached If the strange noise persists contact your sales or service representative No e mail is received when an Alert occurs and after resolving an Alert e Confirm the Alert Messages settings on Web Image Mon itor or Smart Organizing Monitor e When the power is turned off before the e mail is trans mitted the e mail will not be received e Check the e mail address set for the destination If the e mail was sent but not received it is possible the desti nation was incorrect Also check error mail information from the e mail server The Alert Messages settings on Web Image Monitor or Smart Organizing Monitor
182. inted 91 Mac OS X Configuration Printer Configuration Clicking Printer Configuration on the User Tools tab enables you to change the printer settings in the Printer Configuration dialog box You can use the Printer Configuration dialog box to change the settings of e Paper Input e Maintenance e System e Network e Printer 9 Note O Printer Configuration can be used only when there are no print jobs waiting to be processed on this printer Reference For details about each item you can specify in the Printer Configuration dialog box see Smart Organizing Monitor Help About menu and mode There are two modes you can use to access the Printer Configuration dialog box for administrator mode and general users mode Available tabs in the Printer Configuration dialog box differ depending on the mode you are in Administrator In the Access Code dialog box enter an access code All tabs in the Printer Configuration dialog box are available lt General users Only the Paper Input tab is available 92 Using Smart Organizing Monitor Changing the paper settings On the Paper Input tab you can change paper size and other paper settings Note O The paper settings are not available for the bypass tray Tray 1 e Paper Size The following sizes are available A4 210 x 297 mm B5 JIS 182 x 257 mm A5 148 x 210 mm B6 JIS 128 x 182 mm A6 105 x 148 mm 8 1 2 x 14
183. inter Types This printer comes in two models that have different duplex functions When describing procedures that are model specific this manual refers to the different printer models as Type 1 or Type 2 The following table describes the model types lt Model types Model type Model name Duplex Printing Type 1 SP 3400N Manual Type 2 SP 3410DN Automatic Furthermore the 120V_ symbol is used for information that is relevant only to the 120 V model printer and the 220 240V symbol is used for infor mation that is relevant only to the 220 to 240 V model printer Checking the voltage rating of your printer e Check the label on the left side of your printer for the voltage rating BXG002 r 1 Preparing for Printing Confirming the Connection Method This printer supports network and local connections Before installing the printer driver check how the printer is connected Follow the driver installation procedure that is appropriate to the connection method Network Connection This printer can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer Using this printer as the Windows printing port Network connections can be established via Ethernet gt Standard TCP IP Windows 2000 XP Vista Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 BXG500 lt Operating system Windows 2000 XP Vista and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 lt Connection method Ethernet 10BASE T 100BASE TX
184. is exposed Glue may stick to the inner parts of the printer which can cause paper feed problems deterioration in print quality or premature wear of the print cartridge s photo conductor unit lt OHP transparencies Item Description Supported paper tray Bypass tray Duplex supported size None Notes When loading OHP transparencies take care not to load them upside down Doing so may cause a malfunction It is recommended to place one sheet at a time Make sure to fan OHP transparencies every time before printing Leaving OHP transparencies loaded in the by pass tray may cause them to stick together and result ina misfeed If multiple OHP transparencies are fed at the same time load them one by one When printing on OHP transparencies remove the trans parencies one by one as they are output 37 38 Paper and Other Media Envelope Item Description Supported paper tray Bypass tray Duplex supported size None Notes e Avoid using self adhesive envelopes They may cause printer malfunctions e The number of envelopes that can be printed in one minute is approximately half that of plain paper e If printed envelopes come out badly creased load the envelopes in the opposite direction Also configure the printer driver to rotate the print object 180 degrees For details about changing the loading orientation see the printer driver Help Paper
185. it einem Host Computer und oder Peripherieger ten korrekt abgeschirmte und geerdete Kabel und Stecker verwendet werden Anwender in den USA ACHTUNG Zum Einhalten der FCC Emissionsgrenzwerte m ssen fiir Verbindungen mit einem Host Computer und oder Peripherieger ten korrekt abgeschirmte und geerdete Kabel und Stecker verwendet werden Alle Anwender A Ein Magnetkern f r das Ethernet Schnittstellenkabel wird mit diesem Ger t mitgeliefert Machen Sie etwa 5 cm 2 Zoll vom ger tenahen Ende des Kabels eine Schlaufe Bringen Sie den Magnetkern an B Schlie en Sie das Ethernet Kabel am Ethernet Anschluss an der sich an der R ckseite des Druckers befindet Verbinden Sie das Kabelende an dem sich der Magnetkern befindet mit dem Drucker C Verbinden Sie das andere Ende des Kabels mit dem Netzwerk zum Beispiel ber einen Hub Hardware Anleitung Papier und andere Medien gt Hinweise zum Papier gt Einlegen von Papier Wenn Sie Papier in ein Papiermagazin eingelegt haben stellen Sie immer den Papiertyp und das Format f r das Magazin mithilfe von Smart Organizing Monitor oder Web Image Monitor ein Wenn die Einstellungen in Drucker und Druckertreiber nicht bereinstimmen sind die Druckergebnisse m glicherweise nicht wie erwartet Hardware Anleitung Papier und andere Medien gt Einlegen von Papier gt Einlegen von Papier in den Bypass gt Einlegen von Umschl gen Wenn Sie Umschl ge bedrucken leg
186. itor gt Visa skrivarens status Monitor Handbok f r programvara Den r tta syntaxen f r lpr kommandot ar som f ljer Speciella hanteringar i Windows gt Skriva ut c gt lpr S skrivarens IP adress P skrivarnamn o 1 filer direkt fran Windows gt Skriva ut s kv g filnamn kommandon gt Ipr c gt lpr S skrivarens v rdnamn P skrivamamn o 1 s kv g filnamn Handbok f r programvara Speciella hanteringar i Windows gt Skriva filer direkt fran Windows gt Skriva kommandon gt ftp Den r tta syntaxen f r ftp kommandot r som f ljer ftp gt put s kv g filnamn alternativet ftp gt mput s kv g filnamn s kv g filnamn Handbok f r programvara Speciella hanteringar i Windows gt Skriva filer direkt fran Windows gt Skriva kommandon gt ftp User och Password f r att verf ra data via ftp n r b da fastst llda till sysadm F r att verf ra data via ftp ange sysadm Amne Fel R ttelse Handbok f r maskinvara Installera skrivaren och tillval gt Installera skrivaren gt Packa upp Handbok f r snabbinstallation 2 Packa upp 5 Ta bort skyddsmaterialet som r fastsatt p skrivarens insida 5 Ta bort skyddsmaterialet som r fastsatt p skrivarens insida BxGOIE F ljande beskrivningar g ller inte f r den har mask inen Amne Fel Handbok f r maskinvara Ansluta skrivaren gt N tverksanslutning
187. itteisto opas Tulostimen ja lis varusteiden asentaminen gt Tulostimen asentaminen gt Pakkauksen purkaminen Pika asennusopas 2 Pakkauksen purkaminen 5 Poista tulostimen sis puolelle kiinnitetty suojamateriaali 5 Poista tulostimen sis puolelle kiinnitetty suojamateriaali BXGOIS Seuraavat kuvaukset eiv t koske tit laitetta Aihe Virhe Laitteisto opas ROBERTA Tulostimen kytkeminen gt Verkkoyhteys Ararccas K yt suojattua Ethernet kaapelia Suojaamattomat kaapelit aiheuttavat s hk magneettisia h iri it jotka voivat aiheuttaa toimintah iri n Laitteisto opas Paperi ja muut tulostusmateriaalit gt Paperisuositukset gt Paperityypit ja muut tulostusmateriaalit gt Paperityypit Laitteisto opas Paperi ja muut tulostusmateriaalit gt Paperin asettaminen gt Paperin asettaminen ohisy tt tasoon gt Kirjekuorien asettaminen V lt itsest n liimautuvien kirjekuorien k ytt Ne saattavat johtaa tulostimen toimintah iri ihin Laitteisto opas Vianm ritys gt Smart Organizing Monitorin virhe ja tilaviestit Aseta valitunkokoista paperia kasettiin ja muuta sitten paperikoon asetus k ytt m ll Smart Organizing Monitor Ohjelmisto opas Muut tulostustoiminnot gt Lajittelu S Huom Jos ensimm isen tulostussarjan aikana suoritetaan automaattinen jatkaminen lajittelu keskeytyy Jos ensimm isen tulostussarjan aikana suoritetaan sivu
188. ix Presentation Server Citrix XenApp The following explains how to use Windows Terminal Service and Citrix Presentation Server Citrix XenApp Operating Environment The following operating systems and Citrix Presentation Server Citrix XenApp versions are supported Windows 2000 Server Advanced Server e Citrix Presentation Server 4 0 e Citrix XenApp 4 5 lt Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 e Citrix Presentation Server 4 0 e Citrix XenApp 4 5 Supported Printer Drivers lt When Windows Terminal Service is operating e PCL printer driver e PostScript 3 101 102 Appendix Limitations The following limitations apply to the Windows Terminal Service environment These limitations are built in Windows Terminal Service or Citrix Presentation Server Citrix XenApp Citrix Presentation Server Citrix XenApp Auto creating client printers Using Auto creating client printers you can select a logical printer created by copying the client s local printer data to the Citrix Presentation Server Citrix XenApp We strongly recommend testing this function in your network envi ronment before using it for your work e The settings for optional equipment will not be stored in the server after the equipment is disconnected The settings for optional equipment will be restored to its defaults each time the client computer logs on to the server e When printing a large number of bitmap images or using the server in a W
189. izontal print position in the range of from 15 to 15 in increments of 0 1 mm e Vertical After printing the test sheet you can adjust the vertical print position in the range of from 15 to 15 in increments of 0 1 mm Printer Configuration System Tab Make system access code and language settings To configure a function select the check box to the left of the function s name Auto Continue Select how the printer responds if it does not have a paper tray that contains the paper size and type specified by a job e Off The printer stops operation until the correct paper is loaded e On After 10 seconds the printer begins printing regardless of the size and type of paper loaded in the tray Copies Specify a number of print copies 1 to 999 Sub Paper Size Select whether or not to enable A4 Letter switching 2 Sides Print Prints on both sides of sheets e Off Disables Duplex printing e Long Edge Bind Prints output so that you can open it to the left when bound along the left edge like a book e Short Edge Bind Prints output so that you can open it to the top when bound along the top like a calendar 9 Note If you are using a printer that does not support automatic duplex printing perform normal single sided printing and then reset the sheet to print on the other side Blank Pages Select whether or not to print on blank pages Image Density Adjustment Specify the print density 3 to 3 in the box
190. kolt Ethernet k belt haszn ljon A nem rny kolt k belek haszn lata elektrom gneses interferenci t id z el amely meghib sod st okozhat Hardver tmutat Ker lje az ntapad bor t kok haszn lat t Ezek a nyomtat Pap r s egy b hordoz k gt Pap rral meghib sod s hoz vezethetnek Hardver tmutat Hibaelh r t s gt Hiba s llapot zenetek a Smart Organizing Monitoron T ltse be a kiv lasztott m ret pap rt az adagol ba majd a Smart Organizing Monitor seg ts g vel v ltoztassa meg a pap rm ret be ll t s t Szoftver tmutat Egy b nyomtat si m veletek gt Sz tv logat s RZ Megjegyzes Ha az els p ld nyn l Automatikus folytat s t rt nik a sz tv logat s t rl dik Ha az els p ld nyn l lapdob s t rtenik a szetv logat s t rl dik Referencia A nyomtat si m dszerek r szleteit l sd a nyomtat vez rl S g j ban 26 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 27 of 32 o Uwagi dla uzytkownikow Te uwagi to dodatkowe informacje na temat uzywania produktu i errata dla opisu w podrecznikach uzytkownika Temat Poprawnie Podrecznik sprzetu Nastepujaca procedura jest wymagana po kroku 1 w Podreczniku Podtaczanie drukarki gt Potaczenie sieciowe Podrecznik instalacji oprogramowania dla po czenia sieciowego 1 Wydruk strony testowej sprz tu i przed krokie
191. kommandoen er som folger Specielle handlinger under Windows gt ftp gt put sti filnavn option Udskrivning af filer direkte fra Windows gt ftp gt mput sti filnavn sti filnavn Udskrivningskommandoer gt ftp Softwarevejledning I forbindelse med overf rsel af data via ftp er b de User og Specielle handlinger under Windows gt Password forudindstillet til sysadm Indtast sysadm for at Udskrivning af filer direkte fra Windows gt overfgre data med ftp Udskrivningskommandoer gt ftp Emne Fejl Rettelse Hardwarevejledning 5 Fjern de beskyttende materialer 5 Fjern de beskyttende materialer indvending i printeren indvending i printeren BxGOIE Folgende beskrivelser g lder ikke for denne maskine Emne Fejl Hardwarevejledning Tilslutning af printeren gt Netverksforbindelse WE vigtigt Brug et afsk rmet Ethernet kabel Uskermede kabler danner elektromagnetisk interferens der kan forarsage funktionsfejl Hardwarevejledning Papir og andre medier gt Anbefalet papir gt Papirtyper og andre medier gt Papirtyper Hardwarevejledning Papir og andre medier gt Ilegning af papir gt l gning af papir i bypassbakken gt Ilegning af kuverter Undg at anvende selvkl bende kuverter De kan medf re fejlfunktion p printeren Hardwarevejledning Fejls gning gt Fejl amp statusmeddelelse p Smart Organizing Monitor L g papir i den valgte st rr
192. kommandoer gt Ipr Riktig syntaks for Ipr kommandoen er som f lger c gt Ipr S skriverens adresse P skrivernavn o 1 bane filnavn c gt lpr S skriverens vertsnavn P skrivernavn o I bane filnavn Programvareveiledning Spesielle Windows operasjoner gt Skrive ut filer direkte fra Windows gt Utskriftskommandoer gt ftp Riktig syntaks for ftp kommandoen er som f lger ftp gt put bane filnavn alternativ ftp gt mput bane filnavn bane filnavn Programvareveiledning Spesielle Windows operasjoner gt Skrive ut filer direkte fra Windows gt Utskriftskommandoer gt ftp User og Password for overf ring av data via ftp er satt til sysadm For overf re data via ftp angi sysadm Emne Feil Rettelse Maskinvareveiledning Installere skriveren og tilleggsutstyr gt Installere skriveren gt Pakke ut maskinen Hurtigveiledning for installasjon 2 Pakke ut maskinen 5 Fjem det beskyttende materialet som er festet innvendig i maskinen 5 Fjem det beskyttende materialet som er festet innvendig i maskinen exGola Folgende beskrivelser gjelder ikke for denne maskinen Emne Feil Maskinvareveiledning Koble til skriveren gt Nettverkstilkobling PEvixtig Bruk en skjermet Ethernet kabel Uskjermede kabler skaper elektromagnetisk interferens som kan f re til funksjonsfeil Maskinvareveiledning Papir og annet utskriftsmateriale g
193. kujemy Podr cznik sprz tu Papier i pozosta e materia y gt adowanie papieru gt adowanie papieru do tacy r cznej gt adowanie kopert Koperty kt rych skrzyde ka s otwarte musz by drukowane ze skrzyde kami otwartymi a koperty kt rych skrzyde ka s zamkni te musz by drukowane ze skrzyde kami zamkni tymi Przed zatadowaniem kopert upewnij si e s tak p askie jak to mo liwe Podr cznik sprz tu Dodatek gt Specyfikacje gt Urz dzenie g wne Zasady bezpiecze stwa Przepisy i regulacje prawne bezpiecze stwa dotycz ce lasera gt Zasady Produkt ten jest zgodny z nast puj cymi standardami bezpiecze stwa To urz dzenie jest zgodne z wymogami IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 dla klasy 1 produktu laserowego Podr cznik oprogramowania Przygotowanie do drukowania gt Okre lanie ustawie opcji dla drukarki gt Je li komunikacja dwukierunkowa jest wy czona Gdy nie wybrano W cz obs ug dwukierunkowa Smart Organizing Monitor nie mo e by u yty Wybierz opcj W cz obs ug dwukierunkowa aby u y oprogramowania Podr cznik oprogramowania Inne funkcje drukowania gt W razie wyst pienia b ed w przy okre lonym rozmiarze i typie papieru Gdy wyst pi b d podczas drukowania ustawienia nie mog by zmienione za pomoc Smart Organizing Monitor Podr cznik oprogramowania Monitorowanie i konfigurowanie drukarki gt Korzystanie z Web Im
194. l ethernet porten som finns p skrivarens baksida Anslut kabeln med ferritk rnan mot skrivaren C Anslut den andra nden av kabeln till n tverket anv nd t ex en hubb Handbok f r maskinvara Papper och andra media gt Rekommenderat papper gt Fylla p papper N r du har fyllt p med papper i en kassett se till att du alltid anger papperstyp och format f r den kassetten med Smart Organizing Monitor eller Web Image Monitor Om inte skrivarens och drivrutinens inst llningar st mmer verens kanske utskriftsresultatet inte blir som v ntat Handbok f r maskinvara Papper och andra media gt Fylla p papper gt Fylla p papper i sidoinmatningsfacket gt Fylla p kuvert Vid utskrift p kuvert fyll p kuverten som de levereras i f rpackningen antingen med flikarna ovikta eller med flikarna vikta Innan du fyller p med kuvert ska du se till att de r s tillplattade som m jligt Handbok f r maskinvara Bilaga gt Specifikationer gt Huvudenhet S kerhetsinformation Lagar och best mmelser gt Lasers kerhet Den h r produkten f ljer s kerhetsnormerna nedan Den h r maskinen m ter kraven i IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 f r laserprodukter klass 1 Handbok f r programvara F rbereda f r utskrift gt G ra tillvalsinst llningar f r skrivaren gt Om dubbelriktad kommunikation r fr nkopplad Om Aktivera st d f r dubbelriktad kommunikation inte har valts kan i
195. la carta per il vassoio utilizzando Smart Organizing Monitor oppure Web Image Monitor Se le impostazioni della stampante e del driver di stampa non corrispondono la stampa potrebbe risultare differente da ci che ci si aspetta Guida per l hardware Carta e altri supporti gt Caricamento della carta gt Caricamento di carta nel vassoio bypass gt Caricamento di buste Quando si stampa su buste caricarle cos come sono dopo averle estratte dalla confezione con la linguetta aperta oppure chiusa Prima di caricare le buste appiattirle il pi possibile Guida per l hardware Appendice gt Specifiche gt Unit principale Informazioni sulla sicurezza Leggi e normative gt Sicurezza sul laser Questo prodotto conforme ai seguenti standard di sicurezza Questa macchina conforme ai requisiti della normativa IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 per i prodotti laser di classe 1 Guida software Preparazione per la stampa gt Esecuzione delle impostazioni delle opzioni per la stampante gt Se la comunicazione bidirezionale disattivata Quando Attiva supporto bidirezionale non selezionato Smart Organizing Monitor non pu essere utilizzato Selezionare Attiva supporto bidirezionale per usare il software Guida software Altre operazioni di stampa gt In caso di errori relativi al tipo e al formato carta indicato Quando si verifica un errore di stampa le impostazioni non possono essere cambiate utilizzan
196. large amounts of water Consulta doctor if necessary e ftoner or used toner is swallowed dilute by drinking a large amount of wa ter Consulta doctor if necessary Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam or replacing toner If your skin comes into contact with toner wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and water e If toner gets on your clothing wash with cold water Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function ality and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies avail able at an authorized dealer dl e 8 ha amp RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 8 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM Safety Labels of This Machine This section explains the machine s safety information labels Positions of AWARNING and NCAUTION labels This machine has labels for WARNING and ACAUTION at the positions shown below For safety please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated D BXGOOL Do not incinerate toner or toner containers Toner dust may cause flashback when exposed to an open flame Ne pas incin rer les cartouches ni les bo tes de cartouches de toner e une flamme nue la cendre de toner peut provoquer un retour de flamme Verbrennen Sie keinen Toner oder Tonerkartus
197. lect the interface language and then click OK B Click PCL 6 Printer Driver The software license agreement appears g After reading the agreement click I accept the agreement and then click Next gt 7 In the Method to install printer driver dialog box clear the Search for network printers check box select the Connect a printer using a USB cable check box and then click Next gt g Select this printer and then click Next gt A message appears asking you to check that the USB cable is not connected and the printer s main power switch is turned to off O Check the USB cable and the printer status and then click Next gt 10 When the lt Auto detect USB Port gt dialog box appears connect this printer to the computer using a USB cable and then turn the printer s main power switch to on USB auto detection begins 11 When the dialog box asking you to use this printer as the default printer ap pears click either key 12 When a message appears informing you that the installation was success fully completed click Finish Installing the Printer Driver Using USB Note O O In a Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 environment depending on security settings the User Account Control dialog box might appear after you insert the CD ROM If this is the case click Allow If the printer driver is already installed plug and play is enabled and the printer connected to the U
198. levels Input Tray Status of paper trays and the size and type of paper set in each Maintenance Status of fuser unit transfer roller unit and paper feed roller unit System System information Model Name System Ver sion Memory Size PCL 5e PCL XL and PS3 Counter Status of total counter Network Printer details Device Name Comment IP Address Subnet Mask and MAC Address Using Smart Organizing Monitor under the Macintosh Environment Job Log tab Shows the print job information User Name Name of the user who printed the job normally the user who logged on to Windows File Name Name of the printed document Page s Number of pages printed Start Date Date of printing Status Current status of the printed job User Tools tab Displays the test print setting and allows you to select whether to open the Printer Configuration settings List Test Print Select the item for test print 9 Note For details about test printing see the printer operating instructions e Print Click this button for test print Printer Configuration Open the Printer Configuration settings If Use is selected for Access Code in the System tab the tabs you can see set may vary depending on the access code settings 9 Note Printer Configuration can be used when there is not print job waiting to be processed on this printer IP Address If you cannot obtain the IP address aft
199. lide it to match the stand ard size BXG103 BXG104 g Pinch the end paper guide and slide it inward to match the Legal paper size BXG214 BXG106 47 Paper and Other Media 7 Load the new paper stack print side down Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit marked inside the tray Red i ee lt lt AP BXG107 4 Slide the guides inward until they are flush against the paper s sides Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the projection on the side paper guides i BSP065S 8 Check there are no gaps between the paper and the paper guides both side and end paper guides BXG109 48 Loading Paper If there is a gap between the paper and the end paper guide as in the example below the paper might not feed in correctly BXG108 9 Carefully push tray 1 straight into the printer BXG040 To avoid paper jams make sure the tray is securely inserted 9 Note O The remaining paper indicator on the left front side of the paper tray shows approximately how much paper is remaining P Reference For details about paper types supported by the printer see p 31 Support ed Paper for Each Tray For details about the paper settings see p 34 Types of Paper and Other Media 49 Paper and Other Media Loading Paper in Tray 2 The following example explains the loading procedure
200. log box e Orientation e Form Lines e Font Number e Point Size e Font Pitch e Symbol Set e Courier Font e Ext A4 Width e Append CR To LF e Resolution lt PS Menu Displays settings made under Printer tab in Printer Configuration dialog box e Resolution Reading the Configuration Page Host Interface e USB Timeout e Network Timeout e DHCP e IP Address e Subnet Mask e Gateway Address e Ethernet e USB Setting e Fixed USB Port lt Interface Information e MAC Address e Host Name Counter List e Total Counter e Duplex Counter Type 2 model only Jam Counter e Total Counter e Duplex Jam Type 2 model only e Outer Jam e Inner Jam e Tray 1 Paper Misfeed e Tray 2 Paper Misfeed e Bypass Tray Paper Misfeed Error Log Displays the error logs 9 Note O The printed items and the contents might be different depending how it was printed P Reference For details about printing printer configuration using Web Image Monitor see p 52 Printing Reports For details about printing printer configuration using Smart Organizing Monitor see p 92 Printer Configuration 7 72 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer is 5 Using a Print Server Preparing Print Server This section explains how to configure this printer as a Windows network printer The printer is configured to enabling network clients to use it Elmportant O Under Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2
201. ly from a DHCP server you do not need to perform 2 Installing Smart Organizing Monitor and 3 Specifying the printer s IP address Printing a Test Page Connectthe printer and computer using an Ethernet cable While pressing down the J ob Reset key turn the printer s power switch on and then keep the key pressed until the Alert indicator start to flash Printing starts approximately 30 seconds after the Alert Indicator starts flashing Check the printer s IP address from the printed test page Reference You can also use Web Image Monitor to change the IP address obtained from a DHCP server To access Web Image Monitor use the IP address printed on the test page For details about Web Image Monitor see Soft ware Guide Installing Smart Organizing Monitor Quit all applications currently running Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Select an interface language and then click OK Click Smart Organizing Monitor Select a language for Smart Organizing Monitor installer and then click Next gt Click Next gt After reading the agreement click Yes Click Next gt twice Click Finish Specifying the Printer s IP Address On the Start menu point to All Programs gt Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series gt Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series Status to start Smart Organizing Monitor Note Ina Windows Vista environm
202. m 1 w Podr czniku oprogramowania dla po czenia sieciowego Po przeprowadzeniu tej procedury przejd do nast pnego kroku w ka dym z tych podr cznik w instalacji U ytkownicy w Unii Europejskiej N OSTRZE ENIE Odpowiednio os oni te i uziemione kable i cza musz by u ywane do po cze z hostem komputera i lub urz dzenie peryferyjne w celu spe nienia limit w emisji U ytkownicy w Stanach Zjednoczonych OSTRZE ENIE Odpowiednio os oni te i uziemione kable i cza musz by u ywane do po cze z hostem komputera i lub urz dzenie peryferyjne w celu spe nienia limit w emisji FCC Wszyscy u ytkownicy A Rdze ferrytowy dla kabla Ethernet zosta do czony do tego urz dzenia Zr b p tl z kabla oko o 5 cm 2 cale od ko ca kabla od strony urz dzenia Do cz rdze ferrytowy B Po cz kabel Ethernet do portu Ethernet kt ry jest umieszczony z ty u drukarki Po cz koniec kabla z rdzeniem ferrytowym do drukarki C Po cz drugi koniec kabla do sieci np u ywaj c rozga ziacza Podr cznik sprz tu Papier i pozosta e materia y gt Zalecenia dotycz ce papieru gt adowanie papieru Gdy za adowa e papier do kasety na papier zawsze ustawiaj typ i rozmiar papieru dla kasety u ywaj c Smart Organizing Monitor lub Web Image Monitor Je li ustawienia drukarki i sterownika drukarki nie b d do siebie pasowa wydruki mog by nie takie jakich ocze
203. mables responding to error messages and resolving jams Software Guide Contain procedures for using this printer in a network environment and uti lizing the software How to Read This Manual Symbols This manual uses the following symbols ditimportant Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine and explanations of likely causes of paper misfeeds damage to originals or loss of data Be sure to read these explanations 9 Note Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine s functions and instruc tions on resolving user errors P Reference This symbol is located at the end of sections It indicates where you can find fur ther relevant information Indicates the names of keys and buttons Indicates the names of keys on the printer s control panel Printer Types This printer comes in two models that have different duplex functions When describing procedures that are model specific this manual refers to the different printer models as Type 1 or Type 2 The following table describes the model types lt Model types Model type Model name Duplex Printing Type 1 SP 3400N Manual Type 2 SP 3410DN Automatic Furthermore the 120V_ symbol is used for information that is relevant only to the 120 V model printer and the 220 240V symbol is used for infor mation that is relevant only to the 220 to 240 V model printer Checking the voltage rating of yo
204. mance A WARNING The supplied power cord is for use with this equipment only Do not use with other appliances Doing so may result in fire electric shock or injury Keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols A fire or an electric shock might occur e The wall outlet shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily accessible Connect the machine only to the power source described in this man ual Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and do not use an extension cord Do not damage break or make any modifications to the power cord Do not place heavy objects on it Do not pull it hard nor bend it more than necessary These actions could cause an elec tric shock or fire Power cords that are damaged broken modified trapped under heavy objects pulled hard or bent severely are electric shock and fire hazards Touching the prongs of the power cable s plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and electric shock hazard e Keep the polythene materials bags gloves etc supplied with this machine away from babies and small children at all times Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into contact with the mouth or nose 13 Installing the Printer and Options A CAUTION Keep the machine away from humidity and dust Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might occur Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilt ed surfac
205. mark text In the Feature Sets list select Watermark Text and then select the watermark text in the list You can select the following text e CONFIDENTIAL e URGENT e DRAFT e ORIGINAL e COPY Watermark Font Size Points Use this function to select the watermark font size In the Feature Sets list select Watermark Text and then select the watermark font size in the list Watermark Font Typeface Use this function to select the watermark font typeface In the Feature Sets list select Watermark Text and then select the watermark typeface Watermark Font Shading Use this function to select the watermark font shading In the Feature Sets list select Watermark Text and then select the watermark font shading in the list Watermark Position Use this function to select the watermark position In the Feature Sets list select Watermark Location Then in the Watermark Position Horizontal and Watermark Position Vertical lists select the horizon tal and vertical positions respectively Watermark Angle Use this function to select the watermark angle In the Feature Sets list select Watermark Location and then select the watermark angle in the list Watermark Use this function to select which page s to print the watermark on In the Feature Sets list select Watermark Location and then in the Watermark list select which page s you want to print the watermark on You
206. me im possible For easy replacement we recommend you purchase and store extra print cartridges O The actual number of printable pages varies depending on the image volume and density number of pages printed at a time paper type and paper size used and environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity O Print cartridges may need to be changed sooner than indicated above due to deterioration over the period of use O Print cartridges consumables are not covered by warranty However if there is a problem contact the store where they were purchased O When you first use this printer use the print cartridge packaged with the printer O The supplied print cartridge is good for approximately 1 500 pages Specifications Specifications This section lists the printer s specifications Main Unit lt Configuration Desktop Print process Laser electrostatic transfer Warm up time Less than 20 seconds 23 C 71 6 F Paper sizes e Standard paper sizes A4 B5 JIS A5 B6 S A6 Legal 81 2 x 14 Letter 81 2 x 11 Half Letter S 5 1 2 x 81 2 Executive 7 4 x 10 2 8 x13 81 2 x 13 Folio 81 4 x 13 16K 195 x 267 mm Com 10 4 g x9 2 Monarch 3 3 x7 2 C5 Env 162 x 229 mm C6 Env 114 x 162 mm DL Env 110 x 220 mm e Custom size e Tray 1 100 to 216 mm 3 94 to 8 50 inches in width 148 to 356 mm 5 83 to 14 02 inches in length e Bypass Tray 90 to 2
207. n of the printer connected to the usb port appears in the Printers window The printer drivers can be installed from the CD ROM provided with this printer If the printer driver is not already installed follow the printer s plug and play instructions to install it from the provided CD ROM O Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable Connect the USB cable firmly The Found New Hardware dialog box appears 2 Click Locate and install driver software Recommended If the User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue Installing the Printer Driver Using USB E Click Don t search online A message prompting you to insert the provided CD ROM appears O Insert the provided CD ROM into the computer s CD ROM drive The printer driver search begins and a list of printer drivers appears B Select the printer driver you want to use and then click Next If the Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software message appears click Install this driver software anyway g Click Close If the installation is successful the icon of the printer connected to the USB001 port appears in the Printers window Note O To disable Auto Run press the Shift key when inserting the CD ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD ROM O The number after USB varies depending on the number of printers con nected O The USB port is
208. name Primary DNS Server IP Enter the DNS Server IP address in the following format xxx xxx xxx xxx replace x with the appropriate numbers for example 123 123 123 123 When the DNS method is set to Auto you cannot manually specify the pri mary DNS server IP address DNS Domain Name Enter the domain name using up to 32 alphanumeric characters When the DNS method is set to Auto you cannot manually specify the pri mary DNS domain name Printer Configuration Network 2 Tab Use this page to enter administrative information related to the network To display or configure a setting select it in the list The following menus are available in the list e SMTP e SNMP SMTP SMTP Authentication Select whether to log on to the SMTP server using SMTP AUTH for sending e mail Port Number Enter the port number used for sending e mail to the SMTP server Enter a value between 1 and 65535 SMTP Server Name Enter the IP address or host name of the SMTP server using up to 32 characters Note When the SMTP server host name is specified a DNS server must be set up so the IP address can be obtained from the host name forward lookup User Name Enter the SMTP account name to be used when SMTP Authentication is set to On Use up to 32 alphanumeric characters Password Enter the SMTP account password to be used when SMTP Authentication is en abled Use up to 32 alphanumeric characters E mail Addres
209. nches Note O The print area may vary depending on the paper size printer language and printer driver settings 39 40 Paper and Other Media Envelope a a Print area Feed direction Approximately 4 2 mm 0 17 inches Approximately 4 2 mm 0 17 inches Note O The print area may vary depending on the paper size printer language and printer driver settings O For better print quality we recommend the right left top and bottom print margins to be at least 15 mm 0 6 inches each Loading Paper Loading Paper This section describes how to load paper into the paper tray and bypass tray A CAUTION Do not pull out the paper tray forcefully If you do the tray might fall and cause an injury Loading Paper in Tray 1 The following example explains the loading procedure for the standard paper tray Tray 1 The same procedure can be used for the optional paper feed unit ditimportant O Make sure paper is not stacked above the limit mark inside the tray Misfeeds might occur O After loading paper in the tray specify the paper type and size using Smart Organizing Monitor O Do not mix different types of paper in the same paper tray O Do not move the side paper guides forcefully Doing so can damage the tray O Do not move the end paper guide forcefully Doing so can damage the tray O When inserting the tray make sure it is not slanted Insert
210. ndle the plug with wet hands Doing this may result in receiving an electric shock Before moving the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet If the cord is unplugged abruptly it could become damaged Damaged plugs or cords can cause an electrical or fire hazard Elmportant O Tray 1 is required to print using the optional paper feed unit Without Tray 1 paper jams will occur O Certain options might not be available in some countries For details contact your local dealer O Do not grip the tray areas when moving the printer 1 Check the package contains the paper feed unit BXG206 2 Turn off the power and then unplug the printer s power cord from the wall outlet 23 Installing the Printer and Options E Remove the protective material attached inside the tray BXG205 O Lift the printer using the inset grips on both sides BXG010 B There are three upright pins on the optional paper feed unit Align them with the holes on the underside of the printer and then carefully lower the printer onto them BXG024 G After installing the option print the configuration page to confirm the installation If it is installed properly Tray 2 will appear under Tray Info on the con figuration page 24 Installing the Optional Paper Feed Unit Note O When moving the printer remove the optional paper feed unit O After installing the optional paper feed unit sel
211. ng a large volume of data may take considerable time to stop Collate Collate Use the Collate function to print documents into page ordered sets Collate Output can be assembled as sets in sequential order BVN502 9 Note O If Auto Continue occurs on the first set the Collate will be canceled O If form feed occurs on the first set the Collate will be canceled y Reference For details about printing method see the printer driver Help 33 Other Print Operations Cover Use the Cover function to insert cover sheets using paper in a specified tray Note O The cover sheet s size and orientation must be the same as those of the body paper P Reference For details about printing methods see the printer driver Help 34 Watermark Watermark Use the Watermark function to print watermark text 9 Note O If the watermark size is larger than the paper size watermarks cannot be printed properly P Reference For details about the setting method see the printer driver Help 35 36 Other Print Operations Manual Duplex To print on both sides of paper using the Type 1 model use the Manual Duplex function Follow the procedure below to perform manual duplex printing In Manual Duplex printing the printer prints only even pages of a document first asks you to reload the output paper turned upside down into the printer and then prints odd pages on the back sides of the paper ii
212. ng envelopes Avoid using self adhesive envelopes They may cause printer malfunctions Hardware Guide Troubleshooting gt Error amp Status Messages on Smart Organizing Monitor Load paper of the selected size in the tray and then change the paper size setting with Smart Organizing Monitor Software Guide Other Print Operations gt Collate I Note If Auto Continue occurs on the first set the Collate will be canceled If form feed occurs on the first set the Collate will be canceled Reference For details about printing method see the printer driver Help 2 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 3 of 32 o Hinweise fur Anwender Diese Hinweise bieten zus tzliche Informationen zur Verwendung dieses Produkts sowie Berichtigungen zu den Beschreibungen in den Bedienungsanleitungen Thema Berichtigung Hardware Anleitung AnschlieBen des Druckers gt Netzwerkverbindung Software Installationsanleitung fiir Netzwerkverbindungen 1 Ausdrucken einer Testseite Das folgende Verfahren muss nach Schritt 1 in der Hardware Anleitung und vor Schritt 1 in der Software Installationsanleitung fiir Netzwerkverbindungen durchgefiihrt werden Nach Durchfiihrung dieses Verfahrens fahren Sie mit dem ndchsten Schritt im jeweiligen Handbuch fort Anwender in der EU Mac HTUNG Zum Einhalten der Emissionsgrenzwerte miissen fiir Verbindungen m
213. ng paper types are available Thin Paper Thick Paper 1 Plain Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Recycled Paper Color Paper Preprinted Paper Prepunched Paper Letterhead Bond Paper Cardstock Labels Envelope OHP e Custom Paper Size You can make the custom paper size settings when Custom Paper Size is selected e Unit Specify the unit of measurement in mm or inch e Horizontal Specify the horizontal width between 90 and 216 mm 3 54 and 8 50 inch e Vertical Specify the vertical length between 140 and 356 mm 5 51 and 14 02 inch 9 Note O Tray 2 is available only when the optional paper feed unit is attached to the printer 94 Using Smart Organizing Monitor Adjusting registration On the Maintenance tab you can adjust print starting positions Normally you do not have to adjust registration However adjustment can be useful in some cases especially if you want to print in a specific position Under Registration Tray 1 Registration Tray 2 Registration Bypass Tray and Registration Duplex Tray you can adjust the print image position printed on the sheet fed from each tray To check the adjustment result use Print Test Sheet Setting basic functions On the System tab you can set the basic functions required to use the printer The printer can be used on factory set defaults but the configuration can be changed depending on the condition of the user The changed condition holds even if th
214. ngen netwerktoepassing configureren Softwarehandleiding U kunt een getal tussen 1 en 999 opgeven voor DNS time out De printer controleren en configureren gt De Web seconden Image Monitor gebruiken gt Netwerkinstellingen configureren gt De DNS instellingen configureren Softwarehandleiding Wanneer u via een USB verbinding afdrukt is de printerinformatie De printer controleren en configureren gt Smart Organizing in Smart Organizing Monitor misschien niet goed bijgewerkt Monitor gebruiken gt De printerstatus weergeven Softwarehandleiding De juiste syntax voor het Ipr commando is als volgt Speciale bewerkingen onder Windows gt c gt Ipr S IP adres van de printer P optie o 1 pad best naam Bestanden rechtstreeks vanuit Windows c gt Ipr S hostnaam van de printer P optie o 1 pad best naam afdrukken gt Afdrukopdrachten gt lpr Softwarehandleiding De juiste syntax voor het ftp commando is als volgt Speciale bewerkingen onder Windows gt ftp gt put pad best naam optie Bestanden rechtstreeks vanuit Windows ftp gt mput pad best naam pad bestandsnaam afdrukken gt Afdrukopdrachten gt ftp Softwarehandleiding User en Password voor het verzenden van gegevens via ftp zijn Speciale bewerkingen onder Windows gt allebei sysadm Om gegevens via ftp te verzenden voert u Bestanden rechtstreeks vanuit Windows sysadm in afdrukken gt Afdrukopdrachten gt ftp Onderwe
215. ngs page to configure the password lt Administrator Password Item Description New Password Enter the new administrator password Can contain up to 16 characters Confirm New Password Enter the same password again to confirm Restoring the Default Settings Click the Default Settings tab on the administrator settings page to restore the printer s default settings Item Description Clear Network Settings Select to restore the network settings to their defaults Clear Menu Settings Select to restore the menu settings to their defaults 53 54 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Backing Up the Printer s Settings Click the Backup Settings tab on the administrator settings page to create backup files containing the printer s configuration settings If necessary these backup files can be used to restore previous configurations iitimportant O When sending the printer for repair it is important that you create backup files in advance The printer s settings are returned to the default after repair Backup Settings Item Description Network Settings Backup Backs up settings configured on the Network Status Network Application DNS Alert Messages SNMP and SMTP pages as well as the administrator password for Web Im age Monitor Menu Settings Backup Backs up the menu settings that are not related to the network Follow
216. nitor specify public Trap Community Enter the community name to use for authen tication of Trap requests Can contain up to 32 characters 49 50 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer System Item Description Location Enter the location of the printer The location entered here is displayed on the main page Can contain up to 64 characters Contact Enter the contact information of the printer The contact information entered here is dis played on the main page Can contain up to 64 characters Using Web Image Monitor Configuring the SMTP Settings Click the SMTP tab on the network settings page to configure the SMTP settings lt SMTP Settings Item Description Primary SMTP POP3 Server Enter the IP address or host name of the SMTP POP3 server Can contain up to 32 characters Port Number Enter the port number for SMTP 1 to 65535 Authentication Method Select an authentication method from the following Anonymous The user name and password are not necessary SMTP Authentication The printer supports NTLM and LOGIN authentication POP before SMTP The POP3 server is used for authentication The same server as the SMTP server is used as the POP3 server User Name Enter the user name for logging in to the SMTP server Can contain up to 32 characters Password Enter the password for logging in to the SMTP server C
217. nsiirto lajittelu keskeytyy Viite Katso lis tietoja tulostustavoista tulostinohjaimen ohjetiedostosta 20 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 21 of 32 o Information till anvandare F ljande r till ggsinformation om hur den h r produkten ska anv ndas samt r ttelse av beskrivningen i anv ndarhandb ckerna Amne R ttelse Handbok f r maskinvara Ansluta skrivaren gt N tverksanslutning Guide till mjukvaruinstallation f r n tverksanslutning 1 Skriva ut en provsida F ljande moment kr vs efter steg 1 i Handbok f r maskinvara samt fore steg 1 i Guide till mjukvaruinstallation f r n tverksanslutning Forts tt till n sta steg i respektive handbok n r du har genomf rt det h r momentet Anvindare inom EU F RSIKTIGT Ordentligt isolerade jordade kablar och anslutningar m ste anv ndas f r anslutning till en v rddator och eller kringutrustning f r att tillm tesg utsl ppsgr nserna Anv ndare i USA DN F RSIKTIGT Ordentligt isolerade jordade kablar och anslutningar m ste anv ndas f r anslutning till en v rddator och eller kringutrustning f r att tillm tesg FCC s utsl ppsgr nser Alla anv ndare A En ferritk rna till ethernet kabeln medf ljer maskinen G r en gla p kabeln omkring 5 cm 2 tum fr n maskin ndan p kabeln S tt fast ferritk rnan B Anslut ethernet kabeln til
218. nsira o CD ROM na unidade de CD ROM Seleccione o idioma da interface e clique em OK Clique em Smart Organizing Monitor Selecione um idioma para o programa de instala o Smart Organizing Monitor e em seguida clique em Avan ar gt O Smart Organizing Monitor oferece suporte para portugu s do Brasil Selecione portugu s do Brasil Clique em Avan ar gt Depois de ler o contrato clique em Sim Clique duas vezes em Avan ar gt Clique em Concluir Especificar o endere o IP da impressora No menu Iniciar selecione Todos os programas gt Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series gt Estado do Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series para iniciar o Smart Organizing Monitor Nota Em um ambiente Windows Vista selecione Executar como administrador para iniciar o Smart Organizing Monitor Clique em Endere o IP e em seguida digite o endere o MAC impresso na p gina de teste ex 00 11 22 aa bb cc na caixa Endere o MAC Na caixa Endere o IP digite o endere o IP que quer definir para a impressora Clique duas vezes em 0K e em seguida em Fechar Instalar o driver da impressora Na caixa de di logo Printer Drivers and Utilities clique no nome do driver da impressora que pretende instalar Depois de ler o acordo clique em I accept the agreement e em seguida clique em Next gt Marque a caixa de sele o Search for network pri
219. nte Smart Organizing Monitor anv ndas V lj Aktivera st d f r dubbelriktad kommunikation f r att anv nda mjukvaran Handbok f r programvara vrig utskriftshantering gt Om fel uppst r med det angivna pappersformatet och typen N r ett utskriftsfel intr ffar kan inte inst llningarna ndras med Smart Organizing Monitor Handbok f r programvara Overvaka och konfigurera skrivaren gt Anv nd Web Image Monitor gt Kontrollera systeminformationen gt Kontrollera r knarinformationen Visar det totala antalet ark som skrivits ut dubbelsidigt 21 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 22 of 32 Handbok for programvara Overvaka och konfigurera skrivaren gt Anvind Web Image Monitor gt Konfigurera n tverksinst llningar gt Konfigurera n tverksapplikationsinst llningar Ange inte 49999 som till gg till 53550 som Port under Inst llningar n tverksskrivning Handbok f r programvara Overvaka och konfigurera skrivaren gt Anv nd Web Image Monitor gt Konfigurera n tverksinst llningar gt Ett nummer mellan 1 och 999 kan anges f r DNS timeout sekunder Konfigurera DNS inst llningarna Handbok f r programvara N r du skriver ut via en USB anslutning kanske inte vervaka och konfigurera skrivaren gt Anv nda skrivarinformationen uppdateras korrekt i Smart Organizing Smart Organizing Mon
220. nted on both sides counts as two printed pages 4 42 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Checking the Machine Information Click the Machine Information tab on the main page to display the printer information Machine Information Item Description Firmware Version Shows the version of the firmware installed on the printer Engine FW Version Shows the version of the firmware for the printer engine Serial Number Shows the serial number of the printer Total Memory Shows the total memory installed on the printer Using Web Image Monitor Configuring the Paper Settings Click Paper Settings to display the page for configuring the printer settings ra Machine Semr a om Tray 1 Item Description Paper Size Select the paper size for tray 1 from the following A4 B5 JIS A5 B6 S A6 Legal Letter Half Letter S Executive 8 x 13 8 5 x 13 Folio 16K Custom Paper Type Select the paper type for tray 1 from the following Thin Paper 52 64g m Thick Paper 1 100 130g m Thick Paper 2 131 162g m Plain Paper Recycled Color Preprinted Prepunched Letterhead Bond Paper Cardstock Label Paper Tray 2 Item Description Paper Size Select the paper size for tray 2 from the following A4 B5 JIS A5 Legal Letter Half Letter S Paper Type Select the paper type for tray 2 from the following Thin Paper 52 64g
221. nters e em seguida clique em Next gt Quando for apresentada a lista de impressoras encontradas clique nesta impressora e depois clique em Next gt Caso seja necess rio clique duas vezes na impressora para apresentar e configurar as defini es e em seguida clique em Continue Se aparecer uma mensagem informando que a instala o foi conclu da com sucesso clique em Finish Nota Se a defini o do endere o IP ou a pesquisa de impressora falhar certifique se de que a impressora est conectada ao mesmo segmento de rede que o PC Copyright O 2009 Printed in China e M012 8614 09 10 13 16 52 5 Device Settings Using Smart Organizing Monitor under fhe Macintosh Environment The following explains the items that are displayed on the Smart Organizing Monitor when using it under the Macintosh environment Device Settings Elmportant Depending on your printer model functions you can use may vary Smart Organizing Monitor Shows device status information Printer To monitor a network printer select Search Network Printer e Search Network Printer In the dialog box select the network printer you want to monitor and then click OK Status Current status of the printer is displayed Status tab Displays details about selected items in the tree Displayed content of tree selected items Tree selected items Displayed content Print Cartridge Remaining toner
222. ntrat cliquez sur Oui Cliquez deux fois sur Suivant gt Cliquez sur Terminer Sp cification de l adresse IP de l imprimante Dans le menu D marrer placez le curseur sur Tous les programmes gt Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series gt tat de Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series pour d marrer Smart Organizing Monitor Remarque Dans un environnement Windows Vista s lectionnez Ex cuter en tant qu administrateur pour d marrer Smart Organizing Monitor Cliquez sur Adresse IP puis saisissez l adresse MAC de l imprimante imprim e sur la page de test Ex 00 11 22 aa bb cc dans la case Adresse MAC Dans la case Adresse IP saisissez l adresse IP que vous voulez d finir pour l imprimante Cliquez deux fois sur OK puis cliquez sur Fermer Installation du pilote d impression Dans la bo te de dialogue Printer Drivers and Utilities cliquez sur le nom du pilote d impression que vous voulez installer Apr s avoir lu le contrat cliquez sur J accepte le contrat puis sur Suivant gt Cochez la case D tecter les imprimantes r seau puis cliquez sur Suivant gt Quand la liste des imprimantes d tect es s affiche cliquez sur cette imprimante puis sur Suivant gt Si n cessaire double cliquez sur l imprimante pour afficher et configurer ses param tres puis cliquez sur Continuer Si un message indiquant la r ussite de l install
223. o n ho z sobn ku gt Vkl d n ob lek Nepou vejte samolep c ob lky Tyto ob lky mohou zp sobit poruchu tisk rny Hardwarov p ru ka Odstra ov n probl m gt Chybov amp stavov hl en v programu Smart Organizing Monitor Vlo te pap r zvolen ho form tu do z sobn ku a zm te nastaven form tu pap ru pomoc Smart Organizing Monitor Softwarov p ru ka Ostatn tiskov operace gt Kompletov n I Upozorn ni Pokud je u prvn sady nastaveno automatick pokra ov n kompletov n bude zru eno Pokud se u prvn sady vyskytujte posun listu kompletov n bude zru eno Odkaz Podrobnosti o zp sobech tisku naleznete v n pov d k ovlada i tisk rny 24 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 25 of 32 le Megjegyz s felhaszn l knak Ez a dokumentum a term k haszn lat val kapcsolatos tov bbi inform ci kat s a kezel si k zik nyvek le r sainak hibajav t sait tartalmazza Szoftver telep t si tmutat a h l zati csatlakoz shoz 1 Tesztoldal nyomtat sa T mak r Helyesb t s Hardver tmutat A k vetkez m velet sz ks ges a Hardver tmutat ban az 1 l p s A nyomtat csatlakoztat sa gt H l zati ut n s a Szoftver telep t si tmutat a h l zati csatlakoz shoz kapcsolat c m k zik nyvben az 1 l p s el tt Miut n v
224. o a Computer via USB Cable lt Network Connection Contact your network administrator If printing still does not start contact your sales or service representative Con sult with the store where the printer was purchased for information about the location of sales or service representatives 75 Troubleshooting When the Printer is Directly Connected to a Computer via USB Cable Windows When the printer is directly connected via a USB cable to a computer but the Ready indicator does not flash or light up use the following method to check the port connection e Fora USB port connection port USBOO n should be set 1 n is the number of printers connected Windows 2000 O On the Start menu point to Settings and then click Printers 2 Click to select the icon of the printer Next on the File menu click Properties E Click the Ports tab 4 Check the Print to the following port box to confirm that the correct port is selected If the port such as LPT1 is not correct reinstall the driver P Reference For details about installation and port settings see Software Guide Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 O On the Start menu click Printers and Faxes BD Click to select the icon of the printer Next on the File menu click Properties E Click the Ports tab 4 Check the Print to the following port s box to confirm that the correct port is
225. o use is displayed in Format for and then select the paper size you want to use in Paper Size If this printer is not displayed in Format for select the printer you want to use 4 Configure the settings and then click OK Reference The Page Setup dialog box varies depending on the application you use For details see the manuals provided with the Mac OS X Setting up for printing from an application 1 Open the file you want to print 2 On the File menu click Print E In the Printer list select the printer 4 Configure the print settings and then click Print 85 86 Mac OS X Configuration Canceling a Print Job from the Computer O Start Printer Setup Utility Under Mac OS X 10 5 start System Preferences and click Print amp FAX Under Mac OS X 10 3 click Print amp FAX in System Preferences and then click Set Up Printers Under Mac OS X 10 2 8 start Print Center 2 Double click the name of this printer 3 Select the name of the job you want to cancel and then click the Delete icon Note O If the printer is shared by multiple computers be careful not to cancel a print job of other user I You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed For this reason printing may continue for a few pages after you cancel printing O To stop a large data size print job may take a while Using PostScript 3 Using PostScript 3 Use the PostScrip
226. o1cTBo HO annapaTHomy o6ecneueHMo bymara u apyrme HocHTenH gt Peromenzanna no HCIIONb30BAHHIO 6ymaru gt 3arpy3ka 6yMarH IIpu 3arpy3ke 6yMarH B JOTOK IONayM BCerya YKa3bIBaliTe THI M pasmep OyMarH Jia HCIONb3yeMoro JIOTKa HCIONE3yA Smart Organizing Monitor mim Web Image Monitor B c yuae He COBIIA ICHUS HACTPOCK IIpHHTepa c HacTpoliKaMH JpaliBepa NeuaTH pesyJbraTbI Ne4aTH MOTYT HE COOTBETCTBOBATE BALIHM OXH AHHAM PykoBojcTBO no annaparHoMmy o6ecnreyennio ByMara u pyre HOCHTeJIH gt 3arpy3xa 6ymarn gt 3arpy3ka Oymarn B 06xoXHoii JIOTOK gt 3arpy3Ka KOHBEPTOB Ilp negara Ha KOHBepTax 3arpyKaliTe HX B TOM IIOJIOKEHHN B KAKOM OHH yIIAKOBAHbI C OTKPbITBIMH KJIANaHaMH HJIH C 3AKPbITBIMM Tepex sarpy3kof KOHBEPTOB YO JIMTECB YTO OHH MAKCHMAJIBHO PA3IIIAPKEHBL PyxoBo cTBOo no amnapaTHomy 06ecneueHMio Tipunoxenne gt Iapamerpbr gt OcHoBHO MOAyIIb TexHnKa 6esonacHocTH OrpaHHueHHa ycTaHOBIeHHbIC 3aKOHaMH gt JlasepHas 6esoracHocTb JJaHHbI TIPOIyKT COOTBETCTBYET CJIEITYFOLLIHM CTAH IAPTaM 6e30MACHOCTM ITOT ammapaT COOTBETCTBYET TPE6OBAHHAM MEIKIIYHAPOIHOTO cragiapra IEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 ma sma3zepHoro o6opynoBauna Kacca 1 PykO0BO ICTBO 110 nporpammHoMy 06ecresennro Ecin He BBIOpaH mapamerp Paspemmts MByCTopoHHHH o MeH Ipoume onepanun orIH Ke pasmepa n Tuna 6yMarH regaru gt I pu IloxroroBka x negara gt BbimonHeHne MaHHbIMH TO HCHMONB3OBaTE Smart Organizing Monitor Hac
227. of the printer to install it from the CD ROM provided 1 Check the printer s power switch is turned to off 2 Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable Connect the USB cable firmly E Turn the printer s power switch back to on Plug and play is enabled and the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box ap pears and USB Printing Support is installed automatically 4 In the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box click Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended and then click Next gt 5 Select the Specify location check box and then click Next gt J insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive When Auto Run starts click Exit 7 Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver are stored If the CD ROM drive is D the source files of the PostScript 3 printer driver are stored in the following location D DRIVERS PS XP_VISTA Language DISK1 g Check the printer driver location and then click OK O Click Next gt Installing the Printer Driver Using USB O Click Finish If the printer driver has already been installed plug and play is enabled and the icon of the printer connected to the USB001 port is added to the Printers window 9 Note O To disable Auto Run press the Shift key when inserting the CD ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD ROM O The number after USB varies depending on th
228. ogramas que est utilizando Introduzca el CD ROM en la unidad de CD ROM Seleccione un idioma de interfaz y haga clic en OK Haga clic en Smart Organizing Monitor Seleccione un idioma para el instalador de Smart Organizing Monitor y despu s haga clic en Siguiente gt Haga clic en Siguiente gt Una vez que haya le do el contrato haga clic en S Haga clic en Siguiente gt dos veces Haga clic en Finalizar Especificaci n de la direcci n IP de la impresora En el men Inicio vaya a Todos los programas gt S mart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series gt Estado de Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series para iniciar Smart Organizing Monitor Nota Enelentorno de Windows Vista seleccione Ejecutar como administrador para iniciar Smart Organizing Monitor Haga clic en Direcci n IP y despu s introduzca la direcci n MAC de la impresora que se imprimi en la p gina de prueba por ejemplo 00 11 22 aa bb cc en la casilla Direcci n MAC En la casilla Direcci n IP introduzca la direcci n IP que desea configurar para la impresora Haga clic en Aceptar dos veces y despu s haga clic en Cerrar Instalaci n del controlador de la impresora En el cuadro de di logo Printer Drivers and Utilities haga clic en el nombre del controlador de impresora que desea instalar Una vez que haya le do el contrato haga clic en Acepto el contrato y a continu
229. omando lpr il seguente c gt lpr S indirizzo IP stampante P nome stampante o 1 percorso nome file ci gt lpr S nome host stampante P nome stampante o 1 percorso nome file Guida software Operazioni speciali in Windows gt Stampa di file direttamente da Windows gt Comandi di stampa gt ftp La sintassi corretta per il comando ftp la seguente ftp gt put percorso nome file opzione ftp gt mput percorso nome file percorso nome file Guida software Operazioni speciali in Windows gt Stampa di file direttamente da Windows gt Comandi di stampa gt ftp User e Password per il trasferimento dei dati tramite ftp sono entrambi fissi su sysadm Per trasferire dati attraverso ftp inserire sysadm Argomento Correzione Errore Guida per l hardware Installazione della stampante e delle opzioni gt Installazione della stampante gt Disimballaggio Guida di installazione rapida 2 Disimballaggio 5 Rimuovere i materiali protettivi presenti all interno della stampante 5 Rimuovere i materiali protettivi presenti all interno della stampante AMI Bxcon exrosa Le seguenti descrizioni non si applicano a questa macchina Argomento Errore Guida per l hardware Collegamento della stampante gt Connessione di rete FHF importante Utilizzare un cavo Ethernet schermato I cavi non schermati creano interferenze elettromagnetiche in grado
230. on and then keep the key pressed down until the Alert indicator flashes once E Printing starts when the printer is fully warmed up Printing starts approximately 30 seconds after the Alert Indicator starts flashing Installing the Printer Driver in a Network Environment 9 Note O If the printer cannot obtain its IP address from a DHCP server install Smart Organizing Monitor and specify the IP address before installing the printer driver O You can also use Web Image Monitor to change the IP address obtained from a DHCP server To access Web Image Monitor use the IP address printed on the test page P Reference For details about the installation procedure see p 9 Installing Smart Or ganizing Monitor For details about Web Image Monitor see p 37 Using Web Image Moni tor Installing Smart Organizing Monitor Smart Organizing Monitor can be installed from the CD ROM provided with this printer Elmportant O If you want to specify the printer s IP address manually or manage several different printer models you must install Smart Organizing Monitor sepa rately for each printer model O If the printer is obtaining its IP address automatically from a DHCP server you do not need to install Smart Organizing Monitor separately Proceed to p 11 Installing the printer driver and install the printer driver O Quit all applications currently running P Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive The installer s
231. onfiguring the settings O When the list of found printers appears click this printer whose IP ad dress you confirmed before the installation and then click Next gt 5 Double click the printer name to display the printer s settings change the settings as required and then click Continue G If a message appears informing you that the installation was successfully completed click Finish 9 Note O When you click Finish the Digital Signature Not Found dialog box might appear To continue the installation click Yes O Auto Run might not work under certain operating system settings If this is the case launch Setup exe from the CD ROM root directory O To stop the selected software installing click Cancel before the installa tion is complete D A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already installed If there is you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run If you still want to install the printer driver use Add Printer See p 22 If a Message Appears during Installation P Reference For details about reconfiguring the printer settings when the search for network printer fails see p 12 If the network printer search fails For details about the network connection see Hardware Guide 11 Preparing for Printing If the network printer search fails This section explains how to reconfigure the settings if the network printer search fails d
232. ons particuli res sous Windows gt Impression directe de fichiers partir de Windows gt Commandes d impression gt ftp La syntaxe correcte pour la commande ftp est la suivante ftp gt put chemin d acc s nom du fichier option ftp gt mput chemin d acc s nom du fichier chemin d acc s nom du fichier Manuel du logiciel Operations particulieres sous Windows gt Impression directe de fichiers 4 partir de Windows gt Commandes d impression gt ftp User et Password pour le transfert des donn es par ftp sont d finis sur sysadm Pour transf rer les donn es par ftp saisissez sysadm Sujet Correction Erreur Manuel du mat riel Installation de l imprimante et des options gt Installation de l imprimante gt Retrait de l emballage Guide d installation rapide 2 Retrait de l emballage 5 Retirez le mat riel de protection attach l int rieur de l imprimante 5 Retirez le mat riel de protection attach l int rieur de l imprimante BxGOLI Les descriptions suivantes ne s appliquent pas cet appareil Sujet Erreur Manuel du mat riel Connexion de l imprimante gt Connexion r seau WE 1mportant Utilisez un c ble Ethernet blinde Les cables non blind s cr ent des interf rences lectromagn tiques susceptibles de provoquer des dysfonctionnements Manuel du mat riel Papier et autres supports gt Recommandations papier
233. or Read PDF manuals and then select the manual you want to read 220 240V If you want to read manuals from CD ROM click Read HTML manuals 120V If you want to read manuals from CD ROM click Read HTML manuals or Read PDF manuals The manual opens Note O Ifyou are using a computer running a Windows operating system the CD ROM opens automatically However AutoRun may not work under cer tain operating system settings If this is the case launch setup exe from the CD ROM root directory Removing Manuals from Your Computer Follow the procedure below to remove manuals from your computer O On the Start menu point to All Programs point to Product Name and then click Uninstall 2 Follow the instructions to remove the manual E click Finish Note O The menu options may appear differently depending on the options cho sen during installation Exterior Front View 1 Control Panel Contains keys for printer control and in dicators that show the printer status 2 Stop Fences Raise this fence to prevent paper from falling off 3 Output Tray Printed paper is output here Up to 125 sheets of plain paper can be stacked here 4 Front Cover Release Button Press this to open the front cover 5 Power Switch Use this switch to turn the power on and off BXG003 6 Front Cover Open this cover to replace the print car tridge or remove jammed paper 7 Tray 1 T
234. oten is op hetzelfde netwerksegment als de PC 09 10 13 16 52 5 Print_M0128614 indd 3 Guia de Instala o de Software para Liga o de Rede Guia de Instala o de Software para Conex o de Rede O presente manual descreve brevemente o procedimento para instalar o controlador da impressora no ambiente de rede Se utilizar esta impressora com o cabo USB consulte o Guia de Software para a instala o do controlador da impressora Para uma utiliza o correcta certifique se de que l o Guia de Instala o R pida e configura as defini es descritas no guia Os seguintes quatro passos s o necess rios para a utiliza o desta impressora 1 Imprimir uma p gina de teste 2 Instalar o Smart Organizing Monitor caso seja necess rio 3 Especificar o endere o IP da impressora caso seja necess rio 4 Instalar o controlador da impressora Nota Se a impressora obt m o endere o IP automaticamente do servidor DHCP n o precisa de executar o 2 Instalar o Smart Organizing Monitor e 3 Especificar o endere o IP da impressora Imprimir uma P gina de Teste Ligue a impressora e o computador com o cabo Ethernet Ao premir a tecla Apagar trabalho ligue o interruptor de alimenta o da impressora e de seguida mantenha a tecla premida at que o indicador Alerta comece a piscar Aimpress o inicia aproximadamente 30 segundos depois do indicador Alerta come ar
235. oting coommnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanncncncnncnnnnnannnnnr iii 83 8 Removing Misfed Paper When Paper is JamMed occccccccononocccocononennnnnananocon ceca ze ce nane nor rrnnnn nace nnmnnn nna 85 Removing Jammed Paper from the Inner Tray 1 Tray 2 85 Removing Jammed Paper from the Bypass Tray i 88 Removing Jammed Paper from the Exit Area Duplex Unit iii 90 9 Appendix Moving and Transporting the Printer uursnnnsnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnn 95 Moving the printer in a short distance nana 95 Moving over a Long Distance 96 DISPOSAl zes urla bin ieri ati ili 97 GConsumables zen een 98 Print Gartridges u 2 02 seen 98 Specifications a He nee 99 Main Unitiisa sera Gillo cl lei i i aiid 99 Paper Feed Unit TK1080 2 lira la 101 Electromagnetic Interference vrrrrn nen nrrereeeri rina eee nere ne nirenenezzzeeene 102 INDEX criari 103 Positions of AAWARNING and ACAUTION labels This machine has labels for AWARNING and ACAUTION at the positions shown below For safety please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated 3 BXG001 WARNING Do net relate toner E er containers 4 ft O Toner dust may cause flashback when exposed to an open flame ATTENTION Ne pas incin rer les cartouches ni les bo tes de cartouches de toner WARNUNG Expos e une flamme nue la cendre de toner peut provoquer un retour d
236. pHKperuIeHHI BHyTpH NpHHTepa IIPHKPpervICHHbI BHYTPH IIPHHTEpa AMI Bxcon exrosa Creayromee He OTHOCHTCA K JaHHOMY altitapaTy Tema Ouum6ka PykoBOACTBO no annapaTHoMy O ecriegennio Ns HO CoenuHeHHe npuHrepa gt CeTeBoe coeguHenme Vcnonbay re 3KpaHMpoBaHHBblli Ka6es Ethernet He kpaHHpoBaHHbIe kabes m co3AaH0T 3JIEKTPOMATHHTHBIE IIOMEXH KOTOPbIE MOTYT MPuHBECTH K c609M B pa6ore PyxoBo cTBOo no annaparHoMy 00 ecneyenunro bymara u apyrne HocHTenH gt PeroMeHKaunn NO HCHOJNE3OBAHMIO 6ymarn gt Bupi 6ymara u Apyrux Hocuree gt Tanbi Oymaru PyxoBojcTBO no amnapaTHomy 00 cneyennro bymara n pyre Hocuresm gt 3arpyska 6ymarn gt 3arpyska OyMarH B 00xOXHO i JIOTOK gt 3arpy3Ka KOHBepTOB He ucnomp3yiite CAMOKJICANHECA KOHBEpTbI ITO MOXKET IIPHBECTH K c6ogM B paOoTe npHHTepa PykoBoOCTBO no annaparHomy 06ecneueHMio VerpaHenme HerionanioK gt COOOMIEHHA 06 ommOKax u COCTOAHHH B Smart Organizing Monitor 3arpy3HTe 6yMary BbIOpaHHoro opMara B JIOTOK H H3MEHHTE dopmar 6ymarH c nomombro Smart Organizing Monitor PYKOBOACTBO 110 NporpaMMHomy 06ecresennro TIpoune oreparmy nesat gt CoprapoBaTe S MpumeyaHue IIpu 3ane cTBOBaAHAM PyHKIIMH ABTOMPOAOMKEHMA BO BpeMA NedaTH NepBoro KOMINIEKTA COPTHPOBKa 6yner OTMEHEHA IIpu 3age crBoBaHHH PyHKIHH Tosa CTPaHHIBI BO BPEMA IIeyaTu TICPBOTO KOMIIIEKTA COPTHPOBKa 6yner OTMEHEHA Ccbinku IloxpoGHee o crroco0a
237. pagina di prova La seguente procedura deve essere eseguita dopo il punto 1 nella Guida per l hardware e prima del punto 1 nella Guida all installazione del software con una connessione di rete Dopo aver eseguito la procedura continuare al punto successivo specificato in ciascun manuale Utenti dell UE NAVVERTIMENTO Devono essere utilizzati cavi e connettori schermati e messi a terra per le connessioni ad un computer host e o periferica al fine di rispettare i limiti di emissioni Utenti negli USA AVVERTIMENTO Devono essere utilizzati cavi e connettori schermati e messi a terra per le connessioni ad un computer host e o periferica al fine di rispettare i limiti di emissioni FCC Tutti gli utenti A Con questa macchina viene fornito un nucleo in ferrite per il cavo di interfaccia Ethernet Formare un anello con il cavo a circa 5 cm 2 pollici O dall estremit del cavo da collegare alla macchina Attaccare il nucleo in ferrite B Collegare il cavo Ethernet alla porta Ethernet situata sul lato posteriore della stampante Collegare l estremit del cavo con il nucleo in ferrite alla stampante C Collegare l altra estremit del cavo alla rete utilizzando per esempio un hub axon Guida per l hardware Carta e altri supporti gt Consigli relativi alla carta gt Caricamento della carta Quando viene caricata carta in un vassoio di alimentazione sempre necessario impostare il tipo e il formato del
238. per Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 18 of 32 Guia de Software Monitorizar e configurar a impressora gt Usar o Web Image Monitor gt Configurar as defini es de rede gt Configurar as defini es de aplica o de rede N o especifique 49999 juntamente com 53550 para Porta No em Defini es de Impress o da Rede Guia de Software Monitorizar e configurar a impressora gt Usar o Web Image Monitor gt Configurar as defini es de rede gt Configurar as defini es DNS poss vel especificar um n mero entre 1 e 999 para Tempo Limite do DNS segundos Guia de Software Monitorizar e configurar a impressora gt Utilizar o Smart Organizing Monitor gt Visualizar o estado da impressora Se imprimir via liga o USB as informa es da impressora no Smart Organizing Monitor podem n o ser actualizadas correctamente Guia de Software Opera es especiais no Windows gt Imprimir ficheiros directamente a partir do Windows gt Comandos de impress o gt Ipr A sintaxe correcta para o comando lpr a seguinte c gt lpr S endere o IP da impressora P nome da impressora o 1 caminho nome do ficheiro c gt Ipr S nome do host da impressora P nome da impressora o 1 caminho nome do ficheiro Guia de Software Opera es especiais no Windows gt Imprimir ficheiros directamente a partir do Windows gt Comandos de impress o
239. plier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might re sult from the use of parts other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products WY EN AN RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 2 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM Notes The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages Check the type of your machine before reading this manual For details see Printer Types Hardware Guide in the CD ROM Model type Model name Duplex Printing Type 1 SP 3400N Manual Type 2 SP 3410DN Automatic Certain types might not be available in some countries Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual With this machine refer to the inch version Power Source 120 V 50 60 Hz 10 A or more Please be sure to connect the power cable to a power source as above Rd dl WY EN AN RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 3 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM Laws and Regulations Legal Prohibition Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law bank notes revenue stamps bonds stock certificates bank drafts checks pass ports driver s licenses The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive We assume no responsibility for its completeness or accuracy If you have any questions con ce
240. plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around the prongs at least once a year Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard Clean the printer periodically to maintain fine printing Dry wipe the exterior with a soft cloth If dry wiping is not enough wipe with a soft wet cloth that is wrung out well If you still cannot remove the stain or grime use a neutral detergent and then wipe over with a well wrung wet cloth dry wipe and let it dry Elmportant O To avoid deformation discoloration or cracking do not use volatile chemi cals such as benzine and thinner or spray insecticide on the printer O If there is dust or grime inside the printer wipe with a clean dry cloth I You must disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year Clean away any dust and grime from the plug and outlet before reconnecting Ac cumulated dust and grime pose a fire hazard O Do not allow paper clips staples or other small metallic objects to fall inside the printer 65 Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Friction Pad and the Paper Feed Roller If the friction pad or paper feed roller is dirty a multi feed or misfeed might occur In this case clean the friction pad and paper feed roller as follows A CAUTION Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine While moving the machine you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged
241. po tadla Zobrazuje celkov po et list vyti t n ch na obou stran ch 23 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 24 of 32 Softwarova prirucka Monitorov n a konfigurace tisk rny gt Pou v n n stroje Web Image Monitor gt Konfigurace nastaveni s t gt Konfigurace nastaven s tov aplikace Nezad vejte 49999 nav c k 53550 pro C portu pod polo kou Nastaven tisku v s ti Softwarov p ru ka Monitorov n a konfigurace tisk rny gt Pou v n n stroje Web Image Monitor gt Konfigurace nastaven s t gt Konfigurace nastaven serveru DNS Pro Prodleva DNS sekundy Ize zadat slo mezi 1 a 999 Softwarov p ru ka Monitorov n a konfigurace tisk rny gt N stroj Smart Organizing Monitor gt Zobrazen stavu tisk rny Tisknete li pomoc p ipojen USB nemus b t informace o tisk rn v aplikaci Smart Organizing Monitor aktualizov na spr vn Softwarov p ru ka Speci ln kony v syst mu Windows gt P m tisk soubor p mo ze syst mu Windows gt P kazy pro tisk gt lpr Spr vn syntaxe pro p kaz lpr je n sleduj c c gt lpr S IP adresa tisk rny P n zev tisk rny o 1 cesta n zev souboru c gt lpr S n zev hosta tisk rny P n zev tisk rny o 1 cesta n zev souboru Softwarov p ru ka Speci ln kony v s
242. printer drivers for network connection see Software Installation Guide for Network Connection 27 28 Connecting the Printer Reading the LED Lamps PI 1 Yellow Lights up when 10BASE T connection is properly established Flashes when data is being transmitted BSP048S 2 Green Lights up when 100BASE TX connection is properly established Flashes when data is being transmitted USB Connection USB Connection Elmportant O USB 2 0 interface cable is not supplied Obtain a USB cable that is correct for the computer you are using O USB connection is possible under Windows 2000 XP Vista Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 and Mac OS X D USB connection with Macintosh is only possible via the printer s USB port O Connect the square shaped connector of the USB 2 0 cable to the USB port BXG025 2 Connect the opposite end s flat connector to your computer s USB interface or USB hub P Reference For details about installing printer drivers for USB connection see Soft ware Guide 29 30 Connecting the Printer Supported Paper for Each Tray This section describes the type size and weight of paper that can be loaded into each tray The capacity of each paper tray is also provided Note O All paper must be set vertically regardless of the paper size Tray 1 Type Size Weight Capacity Plain paper A4 52 to 162g m
243. pu s cambie el ajuste del tama o del papel con Smart Organizing Monitor Manual de software Otras operaciones de impresi n gt Clasificar RZ Nota Si se produce Continuaci n autom tica en el primer juego se cancelar la clasificaci n Si se activa la funci n de alimentaci n forzada en el primer juego se cancelar la clasificaci n Referencia Para obtener m s informaci n acerca del m todo de impresi n consulte la Ayuda del controlador de la impresora 12 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 13 of 32 Opmerkingen voor gebruikers De onderstaande opmerkingen bevatten aanvullende informatie over het gebruik van dit product en errata voor de beschrijving in de gebruiksaanwijzingen Onderwerp Correctie Hardwarehandleiding De printer aansluiten gt Netwerkverbinding Software installatiehandleiding netwerkverbindingen 1 Een testpagina afdrukken voor De volgende procedure moet uitgevoerd worden nd stap 1 van de Hardwarehandleiding en v r stap 1 van de Software installatiehandleiding voor netwerkverbindingen Als u deze procedure hebt uitgevoerd ga dan verder met de volgende stap van elke handleiding Gebruikers in de EU NVOORZICHTIG Om aan de uitstootbeperkingen te voldoen dient u goed beschermde en geaarde kabels en aansluitingen te gebruiken voor verbinding met een hostcomputer en of randappara
244. quindi fare clic su Chiudi Installazione del driver della stampante Nella finestra di dialogo Printer Drivers and Utilities fare clic sul nome del driver della stampante da installare Una volta letto il contratto fare clic su Accetto il contratto quindi fare clic su Avanti gt Selezionare la casella di controllo Cerca stampanti di rete e fare clic su Avanti gt Quando viene visualizzato l elenco delle stampanti rilevate fare clic su questa stampante e quindi su Avanti gt Se necessario fare doppio clic sulla stampante per visualizzare e configurare le impostazioni quindi fare clic su Continua Se viene visualizzato un messaggio che indica che l installazione stata eseguita con successo fare clic su Fine Nota In caso di fallimento dell impostazione dell indirizzo IP o della ricerca della stampante verificare che quest ultima sia collegata allo stesso segmento di rete del PC Print_M0128614 indd 2 09 10 13 16 52 4 Gu a de instalaci n de software para conexi n en red S oftware installatiehandleiding voor netwerkverbindingen Este manual describe brevemente el procedimiento de instalaci n del controlador de la impresora en el entorno de red Si utiliza la impresora con el cable USB consulte el Manual de software para conocer el procedimiento de instalaci n del controlador de la impresora Para garantizar un uso adecuado aseg rese de leer la Gu a
245. r l sa gt Web Image Monitor haszn lata gt Rendszer adatai gt A sz ml l inform ci ellen rz se Megmutatja a k toldalasan nyomtatott lapok sszes sz m t 25 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 26 of 32 Szoftver tmutat A nyomtat monitoroz sa s konfigur l sa gt Web Image Monitor haszn lata gt H l zati Be llit sok rt keinek konfigur l sa gt H l zati alkalmaz sok konfigur l sa A 53550 mellett ne adja meg a 49999 et a H l zati nyomtat si Szoftver tmutat A nyomtat monitoroz sa s konfigur l sa gt Web Image Monitor haszn lata gt H l zati Be llit sok rt keinek konfigur l sa gt A DNS be llit sok konfigur l sa A DNS id t ll p s m sodperc sz m ra megadhat sz m 1 999 k z tt lehet Szoftver tmutat A nyomtat monitoroz sa s konfigur l sa gt A Smart Organizing Monitor haszn lata gt A nyomtat st tusz megjelen t se Ha USB kapcsolaton keresztiil nyomtat a nyomtat inform ci ja a Smart Organizing Monitor programban nem mindig naprak sz Szoftver tmutat Speci lis m veletek Windows alatt gt F jlok Az Ipr parancsot a k vetkez k ppen adja meg c gt lpr S nyomtat IP cime P nyomtat n v o 1 tvonal f jlnev Speci lis m veletek Windows alatt gt F jlok nyomtat sa k zvetlen l Windowsb l
246. r disfun es na impressora Guia de Hardware Rozwiazywanie problem w gt Erros e Mensagens de Estado no Smart Organizing Monitor Coloque papel na bandeja de papel do formato seleccionado e altere a defini o do formato de papel com o Smart Organizing Monitor Guia de Software Outras opera es de impress o gt Agrupar RZ Nota Se a op o Continuar automaticamente ocorrer no primeiro conjunto a fun o Agrupar ser cancelada Se ocorrer um avan o de p gina no primeiro conjunto a fun o Agrupar ser cancelada Refer ncia Para mais informa es sobre o m todo de impress o consulte a Ajuda do controlador de impressora 18 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 19 of 32 li Huomautuksia kayttajille N iss huomautuksissa on lis tietoa tuotteen k ytt misest ja korjauksia k ytt oppaiden kuvauksiin Aihe Korjaus Laitteisto opas Tulostimen kytkeminen gt Verkkoyhteys Ohjelmiston asennus verkkoyhteytt varten 1 Testisivun tulostaminen Seuraavat toimenpiteet tulee tehd Laitteisto oppaan kohdan 1 j lkeen ja ennen Ohjelmiston asennus verkkoyhteytt varten oppaan kohtaa 1 Suoritettuasi n m toimenpiteet jatka kummankin ohjeen seuraavan kohdan mukaan EU k ytt j t TARKEAA Is ntikoneiden ja tai lis laitteiden yhteyksiin k ytettyjen kaapeleiden ja liitinten pit olla asianmukais
247. ramvaren Programvareveiledning Andre utskriftshandlinger gt Hvis det oppst r feil med det spesifiserte papirformatet og typen N r det oppst r en skriverfeil kan ikke innstillingene endres ved hjelp av Smart Organizing Monitor Programvareveiledning Overvake og konfigurere skriveren gt Bruk av Web Image Monitor gt Kontroll av systeminformasjonen gt Kontroll av telleverkinformasjon Viser totalt antall ark som er skrevet ut med tosidig Programvareveiledning Overvake og konfigurere skriveren gt Bruk av Web Image Monitor gt Konfigurere nettverksinnstillinger gt Konfigurere nettverksapplikasjonsinnstillinger Ikke angi 49999 og 53550 for Port under Innstillinger for nettverksutskrift 15 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 16 of 32 li Programvareveiledning Overv ke og konfigurere skriveren gt Bruk av Det kan angis et tall mellom 1 og 999 for DNS tidsavbrudd sekunder Overv ke og konfigurere skriveren gt Bruke Smart Organizing Monitor gt Vise skriverstatus Web Image Monitor gt Konfigurere nettverksinnstillinger gt Konfigurere DNS innstillingene Programvareveiledning Nar du skriver ut via USB oppdateres kanskje ikke skriverinformasjonen i Smart Organizing Monitor riktig Programvareveiledning Spesielle Windows operasjoner gt Skrive ut filer direkte fra Windows gt Utskrifts
248. ray is securely inserted Note O The remaining paper indicator on the left front side of the paper tray shows approximately how much paper is remaining 44 Loading Paper P Reference For details about paper types supported by the printer see p 31 Support ed Paper for Each Tray For details about the paper settings see p 34 Types of Paper and Other Media Loading legal size paper This section explains how to load Legal size paper into the printer The same procedure applies to A4 paper 297 mm or larger Elmportant O Do not move the side paper guides forcefully Doing so can damage the tray O Do not move the end paper guide forcefully Doing so can damage the tray 4 O When inserting the tray make sure it is not slanted Inserting it at a slant can damage the printer O Fan the paper thoroughly before loading it in the paper tray O Remove the tray 1 rear cover by pushing its center BXG041 2 Carefully pull tray 1 and then pull out with both hands BXG031 Place the tray on a flat surface 45 Paper and Other Media 3 Release the extender locks on both sides of the tray and then pull out the extender until it clicks BXG211 After extension make sure the extender s inner surface and the scale are aligned S BSP070S 4 Lock the extender in the extended position BXG212 46 Loading Paper B Pinch the clip on the side paper guide and then s
249. rds and logos are internationally uniform This machine is equipped with the following Energy Saver modes Energy Saver mode 1 and Energy Saver mode 2 The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job or when the Stop Start key is pressed Energy Saver mode 1 This machine automatically enters Energy Saver mode 1 about 30 seconds af ter the last operation is completed Energy Saver mode 2 This machine automatically enters Energy Saver mode 2 1 minute after the last operation is completed lt Specifications Energy Saver mode 1 Power Consumption 70 W or less Default Time Off Recovery Time 10 seconds or less Energy Saver mode 2 Power Consumption 5 W or less Default Time 1 minute Recovery Time 20 seconds or less a gt NE 7 dl RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 11 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM 9 Note O For details about how to configure Energy Saver mode see Using Smart Organizing Monitor Software Guide in the CD ROM ille Reference Using Smart Organizing Monitor Software Guide in the CD ROM Recycled Paper We recommend you to use environmentally friendly recycled paper Please contact your sales representative for recommended paper 11 ie La S AN RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 12 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM Notice Note to users in the
250. rinter Does Not Print Printer Does Not Print Possible Cause Solutions Is the power on Confirm that the cable is securely plugged into the power outlet and the printer Turn the power on Does the Alert indicator stay red If so check the error message on the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box and take the required action Is paper loaded Load paper into the paper tray or the bypass tray See p 41 Loading Paper Can you print a configura tion page If you cannot print a configuration page it probably indicates a printer malfunction Contact your sales or service representative See Software Guide Is the interface cable con nected securely to the printer and the computer Connect the interface cable securely If it has a fastener fasten it securely as well Are you using the correct interface cable The type of interface cable you should use depends on the compu ter you use Be sure to use the correct one If the cable is damaged or worn replace it with a new one See p 99 Specifications Is the Ready indicator blinking or lit after starting the print job If not blinking or lit the data is not being sent to the printer If the printer is connected to the computer using the in terface cable Check the port connection setting is correct For details about checking the port connection see p 76 When the Printer is Di rectly Connected t
251. rning the legality of copying or printing certain items consult with your legal advisor Laser Safety This equipment complies with requirements of 21 CFR subchapter J for class 1 laser products This equipment contains one AlGalnP laser diode with 9 milliwatt 648 663 na nometer wavelength This equipment does not emit hazardous light since the beam is totally enclosed during all customer modes of operation and maintenance Caution Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure dl an NE RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 4 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM Safety Information When using your machine the following safety precautions should always be followed In this manual the following important symbols are used AX WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if instructions are not followed could result in death or serious injury CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if instructions are not followed may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property Environments Where the Machine Can be Used A WARNING e Keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols A fire or an electric shock might occur A CAUTION Keep the machine away from humidity and
252. rp Fout Correctie Hardwarehandleiding 5 Verwijder de beschermende materialen 5 Verwijder de beschermende materialen De printer en opties installeren gt De printer aan de binnenkant van de printer aan de binnenkant van de printer installeren gt Verpakking verwijderen Verkorte Installatiehandleiding 2 Verpakking verwijderen De volgende omschrijvingen zijn niet van toepassing voor dit apparaat Onderwerp Fout Hardwarehandleiding Fk Belangrijk De printer aansluiten gt Netwerkverbinding Gebruik de beveiligde Ethernet kabel Onbeschermde kabels veroorzaken elektromagnetische storing waardoor het apparaat defecten kan gaan vertonen Hardwarehandleiding Gebruik geen zelfklevende enveloppen Deze kunnen storingen van Papier en andere media gt Aanbevelingen voor papier de printer veroorzaken gt Soorten papier en overige media gt Papiertypes Hardwarehandleiding Papier en andere media gt Papier plaatsen gt Papier plaatsen in de handinvoer gt Enveloppen plaatsen Hardwarehandleiding Plaats papier van het geselecteerde formaat in de lade en wijzig dan Problemen oplossen gt Fout amp Statusmeldingen de instelling voor het papierformaat met behulp van Smart op de Smart Organizing Monitor Organizing Monitor Softwarehandleiding Opmerking Overige afdrukbewerkingen gt Sorteren Wanneer Automatisch doorgaan plaats vindt voor de eerste set wordt Sorteren geannuleerd Wanneer er papierdoorvoer
253. rs o em ingl s do driver de impressora Para a utiliza o correta certifique se de ler o Guia de Instala o R pida e configurar as defini es descritas no guia Os seguintes quatro passos s o necess rios para a utiliza o desta impressora 1 Imprimir uma p gina de teste 2 Instalar o Smart Organizing Monitor caso seja necess rio 3 Especificar o endere o IP da impressora caso seja necess rio 4 Instalar o driver da impressora Nota Se a impressora obt m o endere o IP automaticamente do servidor DHCP n o preciso executar 2 Instalar o Smart Organizing Monitor e 3 Especificar o endere o IP da impressora Imprimir uma P gina de Teste Conecte a impressora e o computador com o cabo Ethernet Ao pressionar a tecla J ob Reset ligue o interruptor de alimenta o da impressora e em seguida mantenha a tecla pressionada at que o indicador Alert comece a piscar A impress o inicia aproximadamente 30 segundos depois do indicador Alert come ar a piscar Verifique o endere o IP da impressora na p gina de teste impressa Refer ncia Voc tamb m pode usar o Web Image Monitor para alterar o endere o IP obtido do servidor DHCP Para acessar o Web Image Monitor use o endere o IP impresso na p gina de teste Para mais informa es sobre o Web Image Monitor consulte o Guia de Software Instalar o Smart Organizing Monitor Encerre todos os aplicativos em execu o I
254. s Enter the e mail address used for e mail notification Use up to 64 alphanu meric characters SNMP Get Community Enter the name of the community to which the network interface board be longs using up to 15 alphanumeric characters Only requests from hosts whose community name matches the name you set here will be accepted To search for this printer in Smart Organizing Monitor specify public Manager IP Address Enter the host computer s IP address To have requests accepted from any host set the address to 0 0 0 0 11 Using Smart Organizing Monitor under the Macintosh Environment Network 3 Tab Use this page to enter administrative information related to the network To display or configure a setting select it in the list The following menus are available in the list e Alert1 e Alert2 Alert 1 Alert 2 Display Name Enter the name to display for the alert message using up to 32 alphanumeric characters E mail Address Enter the e mail address to which the alert messages will be sent using up to 64 alphanumeric characters Paper Jam Select this check box to send an alert message to the specified e mail address when a paper jam occurs Print Cartridge Near Empty Select this check box to send an alert message to the specified e mail address when a print cartridge is nearly empty Print Cartridge Empty Select this check box to send an alert message to the specified e mail address when a prin
255. s set as the factory default Change it to Use if you want access code control e Change Access Code If you selected Use for Access Code click this button to change the access code Language Select the language you want to use Printer Configuration Network 1 Tab Use this page to enter administrative information related to the network To display or configure a setting select it in the list The following menus are available in the list e Information e Interface e TCP IP Information Displays the printer name the printer comment and MAC address of the printer Interface I O Timeout USB Select the USB timeout from the drop down list The printer waits before ending a print job if more data is not received through USB When the specified period elapses data reception through oth er interfaces is possible I O Timeout Network Select the network timeout from the drop down list If EOF is not received by the network printer the printer remains waiting When the specified peri od elapses data reception through other interfaces is possible End Of File a code placed by a computer after a file s last byte of data Ethernet Speed Select the Ethernet communication speed For normal use select Auto Select This allows the device to select the optimum speed If communication with the device fails select 10Mbps Half D 10Mbps Full D 100Mbps Half D or 100Mbps Full D
256. selected If the port such as LPT1 is not correct reinstall the driver P Reference For details about installation and port setting see Software Guide 76 Printer Does Not Print Windows XP Home Edition O On the Start menu click Control Panel 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware E Click Printers and Faxes O Click to select the icon of the printer Next on the File menu click Properties B Click the Ports tab g Check the Print to the following port s box to confirm that the correct port is selected If the port such as LPT1 is not correct reinstall the driver P Reference For details about installation and port setting see Software Guide Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 O On the Start menu click Control Panel and then click Printer in the Hard ware and Sound 2 Click to select the icon of the printer Next on the File menu click Properties E Click the Ports tab 4 Check the Print to the following port s box to confirm that the correct port is selected If the port such as LPT1 is not correct reinstall the driver P Reference For details about installation and port setting see Software Guide 77 78 Troubleshooting Mac OS X When the printer is connected to Mac OS X and the Ready indicator does not flash or light up try the following procedures to check the port connection e Use About This Mac to check the USB information e Use th
257. son contenu sont exclusivement destin s aux administrateurs et doivent tre conserv s par ceux ci Mot de passe Quand vous vous connectez cette imprimante vous tes invit saisir votre mot de passe ou votre code d acc s Nous vous recommandons vivement de modifier imm diatement le mot de passe ou le code d acc s par d faut afin d emp cher toute fuite d informations ou utilisation non autoris e par d autres personnes Vous serez invit saisir votre mot de passe ou votre code d acc s orsque vous tenterez l une des op rations suivantes O Modifier les param tres de l imprimante a l aide de Web Image Monitor O Modifier les param tres de l imprimante d un administrateur l aide de Smart Organizing Monitor Pour utiliser le mot de passe ou le code d acc s par d faut laissez e champ de mot de passe vide lorsque vous utilisez Web Image Monitor Lorsque vous utilisez Smart Organizing Monitor saisissez Admin comme code d acc s Pour modifier le mot de passe pour Web Image Monitor et Smart Organizing Monitor vous devez vous connecter en tant qu Administrateur puis configurer les param tres n cessaires R f rence Pour plus d informations sur la configuration d un mot de passe reportez vous a l aide de Web Image Monitor ou Smart Organizing Monitor Administratorhinweise Dieses Handbuch dient dazu Administratoren zusatzliche Informationen zu den Sicherheitsfunktionen dieses Druckers zur
258. ssion chargez les enveloppes telles qu elles sont conditionn es avec le rabat ouvert ou ferm Avant de charger des enveloppes assurez vous qu elles sont aussi planes que possible Manuel du mat riel Annexes gt Sp cifications gt Unit principale Consignes de s curit Lois et r glementations gt S curit laser Ce produit respecte les normes de s curit suivantes Cet appareil est conforme aux directives dTEC60825 1 2007 EN60825 1 2007 pour les produits laser de classe 1 Manuel du logiciel Pr paration de l impression gt Configuration des options de l imprimante gt Si la communication bidirectionnelle est d sactiv e Lorsque Activer la gestion du mode bidirectionnel n est pas s lectionn Smart Organizing Monitor ne peut pas tre utilis S lectionnez Activer la gestion du mode bidirectionnel pour utiliser ce logiciel Manuel du logiciel Autres op rations d impression gt Si des erreurs se produisent avec le format et le type de papier sp cifi Lorsqu une erreur d impression se produit les param tres ne peuvent pas tre modifi s l aide de Smart Organizing Monitor Manuel du logiciel Surveillance et configuration de l imprimante gt Utilisation de Web Image Monitor gt V rification de l Information syst me gt V rification de l Information de compteur Indique le nombre total de feuilles imprim es en Recto Verso Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Dat
259. stalar o software Para informa es sobre como conectar e instalar o driver da impressora para conex o local consulte o Guia de Software For details about connection and installation of the printer driver when using network connection see Software Installation Guide for Network Connection For details about connection and installation of the printer driver when using local connection see Software Guide Weitere Informationen zum Anschlie en und Installieren des Druckertreibers bei Verwendung einer Netzwerkverbindung finden Sie in der Software Installationsanleitung fiir Netzwerkverbindungen Weitere Informationen zum AnschlieBen und Installieren des Druckertreibers bei Verwendung eines lokalen Anschusses finden Sie in der Software Anleitung Pour plus d informations sur la connexion et l installation du pilote d impression lors de l utilisation d une connexion r seau reportez vous au Guide d installation du logiciel pour une connexion r seau Pour plus d informations sur la connexion et D installation du pilote d impression lors de l utilisation d une connexion locale reportez vous au Manuel du logiciel Per ulteriori informazioni sul collegamento e sull installazione del driver della stampante utilizzando una connessione di rete vedere la Guida all installazione del software con una connessione di rete Per ulteriori informazioni sul collegamento e sull installazione del driver
260. surresnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 5 Network Connect ad ia 5 Local COMME CUO E sas rasta SD innerer VA Sa 6 Installing Drivers and Software ss rr 7 Installing the Printer Driver in a Network Environment nn 8 Installing the PCL Printer Driver 8 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver 13 Installing the Printer Driver to Use As a Windows Network Printer 15 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ri inn 16 Installing the PCL Printer Driver ii 16 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver Windows 2000 18 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 19 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 nano nororarorana nana na na nono 20 Troubleshooting USB 21 If a Message Appears during InstallatioN rrriiii iii 22 Making Option Settings for the Printer rrriiieii iii 23 Conditions for Bidirectional Communication era 23 If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled 24 2 Setting Up the Printer Driver Accessing the Printer Properties vsvssrrereniaze ceca ee nice rea nece cnn nananans 25 Windows 2000 Making Printer Settings i 25 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 Making Printer Settings 27 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 M
261. t Papiranbefalinger gt Papirtyper og andre utskriftsmedier gt Papirtyper Maskinvareveiledning Papir og annet utskriftsmateriale gt Legge i papir gt Mate inn papir ved hjelp av multiarkmateren gt Legge i konvolutter Unnga 4 bruke selvklebende konvolutter De kan forarsake feil pa skriveren Maskinvareveiledning Feilsgking gt Feil amp statusmeldinger p Smart Organizing Monitor Legg valgt papirformat i magasinet og endre papirformatinnstillingen med Smart Organizing Monitor Programvareveiledning Andre utskriftshandlinger gt Sortere RZ Merk Hvis automatisk fortsettelse inntreffer p det f rste settet avbrytes Sortering Hvis papirfremmating inntreffer p det f rste settet avbrytes Sortering Henvisning Hvis du vil vite mer om utskriftsmetoder kan du se i hjelpefilen for skriverdriveren 16 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 17 of 32 o Notas para os utilizadores Estas notas fornecem informa es adicionais sobre a utiliza o deste produto e a errata para a descri o nos manuais de opera o T pico Correc o Guia de Hardware Ligar a Impressora gt Liga o de rede Guia de Instala o de Liga o de Rede 1 Imprimir uma P gina de Teste Software para O seguinte procedimento necess rio ap s o Passo 1 no Guia de Hardware e antes do Passo I no Guia de Instala o d
262. t 3 driver to print files You can use the following functions if Printer Features is selected in the Print dialog RL eo Media Type Use this function to select the paper type In the Feature Sets list select Media Type and then in the Media Type list select the paper type you want to use for printing Dithering Use this function to specify the rendering mode In the Feature Sets list select Dithering and then in the Dithering list select the rendering mode You can select Automatic Photographic or Text Print Quality Use this function to select the print quality In the Feature Sets list select Imaging and then in the Print Quality list select the print quality You can select 600 x 600 dpi or 1200 x 600 dpi Toner Saving Use this function to reduce the amount of toner used when printing To reduce toner consumption in the Feature Sets list select Toner Then set Toner Saving to On Print Blank Pages Use this function to print blank pages To print blank pages in the Feature Sets list select Toner Then set Print Blank Pages to On Watermark Type Use this function to select the watermark style In the Feature Sets list select Watermark Text and then select the watermark type in the list You can select Outlined Solid or Transparent Text 87 88 Mac OS X Configuration RL e Watermark Text Use this function to select the water
263. t cartridge is completely empty and needs immediate replace ment No Paper Select this check box to send an alert message to the specified e mail address when the paper has run out Service Required Select this check box to send an alert message to the specified e mail address when the printer requires servicing Cover Open Select the check box to send an alert message to the specified e mail address when the printer cover is open Printer Configuration Printer Tab You can change the following settings which can be set on the printer PCL Orientation Specify the default page orientation e Portrait Prints the document so that the paper s shorter sides are horizontal e Landscape Prints the document so that the paper s longer sides are horizontal Form Lines Specify the number of lines 5 to 128 per page 60 is default for Letter size paper 64 is default for A4 Font Number Specify the default font in the box Point Size Specify the default font size 4 to 999 75 in the box Font Pitch Specify the pitch of the default font if the font is a fixed pitch font selected from the list Symbol Set Specify the default symbol set from the list Courier Font Select Regular or Dark from the list Ext A4 Width Widens the printable area of A4 sheets by reducing side margin width Append CR to LF Specify whether or not to append a CR code to each LF code to print text more clearly 9 Note Only
264. t settings see the printer driver Help 29 30 Setting Up the Printer Driver Making the printer default settings Printing Preferences Elmportant O You cannot change the printer default settings for each user Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users O On the Start menu click Control Panel The Control Panel window appears 2 Click Printer in Hardware and Sound 3 Right click the icon of the printer you want to use and then click Printing Preferences The Printing Preferences dialog box appears 4 Make the necessary settings and then click OK 9 Note O Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications P Reference For details about settings see the printer driver Help Making printer settings from an application You can make printer settings for a specific application To make printer settings for a specific application open the Printing Preferences dialog box from that application The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows Vista Don the File menu click Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Select the printer you want to use in the Select Printer list and then click Preferences E Make the necessary settings and then click Apply to start printing 9 Note O The procedure to open the Printing Preferences dialog box may vary depending on the
265. t u niet punt 2 Smart Organizing Monitor installeren en 3 Het IP adres van de printer specificeren uit te voeren Een testpagina afdrukken Sluit de printer met een Ethernetkabel aan op de computer Terwijl u de toets Taak Reset ingedrukt houdt schakelt u de hoofdschakelaar van de printer aan en vervolgens houdt u de toets ingedrukt tot het lampje Waarschuwing begint te knipperen Er wordt met afdrukken gestart ongeveer 30 seconden nadat het lampje Waarschuwing begint te knipperen Controleer het IP adres van de printer aan de hand van de afgedrukte testpagina Referentie Ukunt Web Image Monitor ook gebruiken om het IP adres dat u verkregen heeft van een DHCP server te wijzigen Om toegang te verkrijgen tot de Web Image Monitor dient u het IP adres op de testpagina te gebruiken Raadpleeg de Softwarehandleiding voor meer informatie over de Web Image Monitor Smart Organizing Monitor installeren Sluit alle toepassingen die zijn geopend Plaats de cd rom in het cd romstation Selecteer een interfacetaal en klik op OK Klik op Smart Organizing Monitor Selecteer een taal voor het installatieprogramma van Smart Organizing Monitor en klik vervolgens op Volgende gt Klik op Volgende gt Klik op J a nadat u de overeenkomst heeft gelezen Klik tweemaal op Volgende gt Klik op Voltooien Het IP adres van de printer specificeren Onder het men
266. tarts 13 Select an interface language and then click OK The default interface language is English 4 Click Smart Organizing Monitor 5 Select a language for Smart Organizing Monitor and then click Next gt The Smart Organizing Monitor Setup dialog box appears g Click Next gt The software license agreement appears 7 After reading the agreement click Yes The Select Destination Folder dialog box appears g Click Next gt Click Browse if you want to change the destination folder Preparing for Printing E in the Select Program Folder dialog box click Next gt 10 When the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box appears click Finish To continue the installation leave the Printer Driver and Utilities dialog box open 9 Note O Smart Organizing Monitor will appear in the language selected in step 5 not the language selected in step 3 Specifying the printer s IP address Use the following procedure to specify the printer s IP address using Smart Organizing Monitor Elmportant O If the printer is obtaining its IP address automatically from a DHCP server you do not need to perform this procedure Proceed to p 11 Installing the printer driver and install the printer driver O Connect the printer and computer using an Ethernet cable 2 On the Start menu point to All Programs and then point to Smart Organiz ing Monitor for 3400 Series gt Smart Organizing
267. te with Macintosh computers running Mac OS X 10 2 3 or higher 99 100 Appendix Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6 0 6 5 or 7 0 Under Windows 2000 XP with Adobe PageMaker you need to copy PPD files to the PageMaker folder PPD files have the ppd extension in the folder DRIVERS PS XP_VISTA Language DISK1 on the CD ROM The third folder Language may be substituted by an appropriate language name Copy the ppd file to the PageMaker folder e For PageMaker 6 0 default installation The directory is C PM6 RSRC PPD4 e For PageMaker 6 5 default installation The directory is C PM65 RSRC USENGLISH PPD4 The USENGLISH may vary depending on your language selection e For PageMaker 7 0 default installation The directory is C PM7 RSRC USENGLISH PPD4 The USENGLISH may vary depending on your language selection Note O If the driver is not set correctly after copying the ppd file printing may not be performed properly O When using PageMaker the optional features that can be selected by the printer driver will not be active The following procedure describes how to activate the optional printer features O On the File menu click Print The Print Document dialog box appears Make the necessary settings in the Features box When Using Windows Terminal Service Citrix Presentation Server Citrix XenApp When Using Windows Terminal Service Citr
268. ten it before loading by bending it the paper in the opposite direction to the curl for example O Do not load paper while the printer is printing O You cannot load paper when the printer is in Energy Saver mode To disable Energy Saver mode click the Stop Start key on the control panel 1 Open the bypass tray BXG051 53 54 Paper and Other Media 2 Slide the side guides outward then load paper with the print side up and BXG052 13 Adjust the side guides to the paper width BXG053 9 Note O After loading paper in the tray specify the paper type and size using Smart Organizing Monitor or the printer driver P Reference For details about supported types of paper see p 31 Supported Paper for Each Tray For details about specifying the paper type and size see Software Guide Loading Paper Loading envelopes A CAUTION The inside of this machine becomes very hot Do not touch parts labelled A indicating a hot surface I I I I I I I I O Elmportant Before printing on envelopes make sure to lower the levers on the printer rear inside the rear cover to avoid envelopes coming out creased Also raise the levers back to their original positions after printing Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on paper other than envelopes Avoid using self adhesive envelopes They may cause printer malfunctions
269. ter from the box and then remove the plastic bag 2 Lift the printer by using the inset grips on both sides of the printer BXG010 BXG011 BXG012 The actual printer may come with protective materials attached in different positions Make sure to check the printer s exterior for all protective materials and remove them completely 17 Installing the Printer and Options O Push the side button to open the front cover and then carefully lower it BXG013 5 Remove the protective material attached inside the printer BXG014 G Unpack the print cartridge Then place it on a flat surface and remove the protection sheet BSP037S Installing the Printer Shake the print cartridge from side to side five or six times 5 6 e de BSP038S 7 Slide the print cartridge in horizontally When the cartridge can go no fur ther raise it slightly and push it fully in Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place BXG017 E Using both hands carefully push up the front cover until it closes BXG018 19 20 Installing the Printer and Options 9 Carefully pull tray 1 and then pull out with both hands BXG204 10 Remove the protective material attached inside the tray BXG205 11 Carefully push tray 1 straight into the printer BXG210 Installing the Printer 12 Pull out and raise the stop fence BXG019
270. the Help Source File Setting tab on the administrator settings page to configure the help source file setting lt Help Source File Setting Item Description Help Source File Enter the help source file path Installing Help 1 Copy the WIMHELP folder on the CD ROM to your computer s hard drive The example procedures explain how to copy the WIMHELP folder to the C tmp WIMHELP directory 2 Access Web Image Monitor and then click Help Source File Setting on the Admin Settings page E In the text box enter C tmp WIMHELP 4 Enter the administrator password if required B click ok Displaying Web Image Monitor Help To use Help for the first time you need to install its source file from the CD ROM provided with this printer 9 Note O By clicking Help in the header area the contents of Help appear O By clicking the Help icon in the main area Help for the setting items in the main area appears Using Smart Organizing Monitor Using Smart Organizing Monitor Smart Organizing Monitor allows you to make printer settings such as input tray and network related settings from your client computer You can also use Smart Organizing Monitor to check printer status The following operations are possible with Smart Organizing Monitor e Displaying the printer status or settings e Checking the locations where errors have occurred and the error recovery methods e Displa
271. ther side of the paper include this blank page in the bundle of paper P Reference For details about loading paper in the trays see Hardware Guide For details about printer driver operation see the printer driver Help A e E e 4 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer You can check the printer s status or change its settings by accessing the printer directly using Web Image Monitor Using Web Image Monitor lt Available operations The following operations can be performed remotely using Web Image Monitor on a computer e Displaying the printer s status or settings e Configuring the printer s settings e Printing reports e Configuring network settings e Setting a password for changing the printer s configuration e Restoring the default values for the printer s configuration e Creating backup files of the printer s configuration e Restoring the printer s configuration from backup files e Displaying the counter information e Making settings for paper loaded into each input tray e Making input tray settings lt Supported Web browsers e Windows Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher e MacOSX Safari 37 38 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Note O I I O O O g g I If you use an older version of a supported Web browser or the Web browser has JavaScript and cookies disabled display and operation problems may occur If you are using a proxy server configure the Web browser se
272. thorized dealer No Paper The indicated tray is out of Load paper into the indicated Load paper in the indicated paper paper tray Paper source tray Bypass Tray 69 Troubleshooting Message Explanation Recommended Action No Response from I O Device Check the cable power cord and main switch No information has been re ceived from the printer Check the main power switch is turned on and the power cord is securely connected Check the USB or network cables are securely connected also No Toner Toner has almost run out Shortly printing becomes not available Please keep Print Cartridge handy The printer is out of toner Replace the print cartridge See p 59 Replacing the Print Cartridge No Toner or Waste Toner full No printing is available Open the indicated cover and then replace Print Cartridge Front Cover The printer is out of toner Replace the print cartridge See p 59 Replacing the Print Cartridge Paper Misfeed Open the indicated cover and pull out Print Cartridge Then remove any misfed paper Front Cover If no paper pull out Tray 1 then remove any misfed paper There is a misfeed in the printer Inner jam Tray 1 jam Remove the misfed paper See p 85 Removing Jammed Paper from the Inner Tray 1 Tray 2 Paper Misfeed Open the indicated cover and then remove any misfed paper R
273. tic notification e mail 5 In the Email Address box enter the recipient s e mail address 6 Select the types of errors that you want the recipient to be notified of 7 Enter the administrator password if required E click oK Printer Status Notification by E Mail Mail Authentication You can configure mail authentication to prevent illegal use of the mail server When an e mail is sent to the SMTP server authentication is performed using the SMTP AUTH protocol by prompting the mail originator to enter the user name and password Follow the procedure below to specify SMTP authentication O In the menu area click Network Settings E Click SMTP in the Network Settings page 13 Make the following settings e SMTP Authentication Select SMTP Authentication or POP Before SMTP e User Name Enter the user name for SMTP Authentication e Password Enter the password set for the SMTP User Name e System Admin E mail Enter the e mail address 4 Enter the administrator password if required E click ok G Quit Web Image Monitor 67 68 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer SNMP You can use the SNMP manager to obtain information about the printer The SNMP agent operating on UDP is built into the Ethernet board that is installed in this printer Elmportant O If you change the printer s community name use Web Image Monitor or Smart Organizing Monitor to change the computer s settings accordingly
274. timen valvonta ja m ritykset gt Web Image Monitorin k ytt minen gt Verkkoasetusten m ritt minen gt DNS asetusten m ritt minen DNS odotusaika sekuntia kohtaan voidaan m ritt aika v lilt 1 999 sekuntia Ohjelmisto opas Tulostimen valvonta ja m ritykset gt Smart Organizing Monitorin k ytt minen gt Tulostimen tilan n ytt minen Ohjelmisto opas Erityistoimenpiteet Windowsissa gt Tiedostojen tulostaminen suoraan Windowsista gt Tulostuskomennot gt lpr Kun tulostat k ytt en USB yhteytt tulostimen tiedot Smart Organizing Monitorissa eiv t v ltt m tt p ivity oikein Ipr komennon oikea syntaksi on seuraava c gt lpr S tulostimen IP osoite P tulostimen nimi o 1 polku tiedostonimi c gt lpr S tulostimen is nt nimi P tulostimen nimi o 1 polku tiedostonimi Ohjelmisto opas Erityistoimenpiteet Windowsissa gt Tiedostojen tulostaminen suoraan Windowsista gt Tulostuskomennot gt ftp ftp komennon oikea syntaksi on seuraava ftp gt put polku tiedostonimi optio ftp gt mput polku tiedostonimi polku tiedostonimi Ohjelmisto opas Erityistoimenpiteet Windowsissa gt Tiedostojen tulostaminen suoraan Windowsista gt Tulostuskomennot gt ftp Tiedon siirt miseen ftp n kautta tarvittava User ja Password ovat molemmat sysadm Siirt ksesi tietoa k ytt m ll ftp t sy t sysadm Aihe Virhe Korjaus La
275. timportant O This function is only available when printing from a computer running a Windows operating system using the PCL 6 printer driver O The printer always uses tray 1 to print on the back sides of paper regardless of the tray you selected with the printer driver Make sure that the paper settings of the trays that will be used match the paper settings of the print job to avoid paper mismatch errors 1 Open the file you want to print on your computer 2 Open the printer driver s properties 6 On the Setup tab select Open to Left Open to Right or Open to Top from the Duplex list O Click ok 5 Configure printing preferences according to your needs and then click OK twice The Manual Duplex guidance screen appears on your computer showing the subsequent procedure and the printer starts printing even pages 6 Reload the output paper into tray 1 with the printed side up If paper orientation is portrait put the top of paper towards you for Open to Left or Open to Right or towards the printer rear for Open to Top If paper orientation is landscape put the top of paper to the left for Open to Left or Open to Right or to the right for Open to Top 7 Press the Stop Start key Odd pages will then be printed 9 Note O When you print a document whose page count is an odd number a blank page is printed first This blank page is the last page of the document When you start printing on the o
276. tional communication is supported by Windows 2000 XP Vista and Windows Server 2003 2003 R2 2008 To support bidirectional communication the following conditions must be met When connected with the network The printer must be connected via standard TCP IP port and the default port name has not been changed Enable bidirectional support in the Port tab of the printer properties is selected When connected with USB The printer must be connected to the computer s USB port using the USB interface cable Enable bidirectional support in the Port tab of the printer properties is selected 9 Note O The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional communica tion O The PCL printer drivers support bidirectional communication You can update printer status manually 23 24 Preparing for Printing If Bidirectional Communication Is Disabled Set up option settings when bidirectional communication is disabled kimportant O Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties in the Printers folder Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member O Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected on the Ports tab in the printer properties dialog box Printing is possible only if this check box is selected O On the Start menu click Printers and Faxes The Printers and Faxes window appears When using Windows 2000 Vista and Windows Server 2008 cl
277. tridge Take care not to tip or tilt the printer during transit Elmportant O Do not remove the print cartridge when moving the printer 1 Be sure to check the following points e The power switch is turned off e The power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet e All other cables are unplugged from the printer e All paper trays are empty 2 If tray 2 is installed remove it P Note O Toner might spill inside the printer if the printer is not kept level during transit O For more information about moving the printer contact your sales or serv ice representative Disposal Disposal Ask your sales or service representative for information about correct disposal of this printer 97 98 Appendix Consumables A CAUTION Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and func tionality and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies available at an authorized dealer Print Cartridges Average printable number of pages per cartridge Black 2 500 pages 5 000 pages Print cartridge The printable number of pages is based on pages that are compliant with ISO IEC 19752 and the image density set as the factory default ISO IEC 19752 is an interna tional standard on measurement of printable pages set by the International Organi zation for Standardization 9 Note O If print cartridges are not changed when necessary printing will beco
278. ttings as neces sary For details about the settings contact your network administrator The previous page may not appear even if the back button of the Web browser is clicked If this happens click the refresh button of the Web browser Displayed information is not automatically refreshed Click the Refresh button in the upper right hand corner We recommend using Web Image Monitor in the same network If the printer is firewall protected it cannot be accessed from computers outside the firewall When using the printer under DHCP the IPv4 address may be automatically changed by the DHCP server settings If the HTTP port is disabled connection to the printer using the printer s URL cannot be established To use JAWS 7 0 under Web Image Monitor you must be running Windows OS and Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 SP2 or a later version Using Web Image Monitor Displaying Top Page This section explains how to display Web Image Monitor and its Top Page Displaying Top Page of Web Image Monitor 1 Start your Web browser 2 Enter http printer s address in the address bar of the Web browser Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears If the printer s host name has been registered on the DNS server you can enter it Top Page Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas tem rt tg o Pate BXG502 1 Menu area When you select Network Settings content of the Network Settings
279. tutes a fire hazard ie dl i sie La S AN RinmeiP1ENSafety_Prefacel Page 6 Friday October 16 2009 11 20 AM e Ha an ZA Handling the Machine A CAUTION Before moving the machine unplug the power cord from the wall outlet If the cord is unplugged abruptly itcould become damaged Damaged plugs or cords can cause an electrical or fire hazard Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine While moving the machine you should take care thatthe power cord will not be damaged under the machine e The machine weighs approximately 12 kg 26 4 Ib When moving the ma chine use the inset grips on both sides and lift slowly The machine will break or cause injury if dropped When moving the machine after use do not take out the print cartridge to prevent toner spill inside the machine Do not connect the Ethernet port of the machine to a network that may sup ply excess voltage such as a telephone line Doing so may result in fire or electric shock Handling the Machine s Interior o A WARNING Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual This machine contains a laser beam gener ator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye damage A CAUTION The inside of this machine becomes very hot Do not touch parts l
280. tuur Gebruikers in de V S VOORZICHTIG Om aan de FCC uitstootbeperkingen te voldoen dient u goed beschermde en geaarde kabels en aansluitingen te gebruiken voor verbinding met een hostcomputer en of randapparatuur Alle gebruikers A Bij dit apparaat wordt een ferrietkern voor de ethernet interfacekabel geleverd Maak een lus in de kabel op ongeveer 5 cm 2 inch van het machine uiteinde van de kabel Bevestig de ferrietkern B Verbind de ethernetkabel met de ethernetpoort aan de achterkant van de printer Verbind het kabeluiteinde met de ferrietkern aan de printer C Verbind het andere uiteinde van de kabel aan het netwerk bijvoorbeeld met een hub Hardwarehandleiding Papier en andere media gt Aanbevelingen voor papier gt Papier plaatsen Wanneer u papier in een papierbronlade geplaatst heeft dient u het papiertype en formaat voor de lade in te stellen met Smart Organizing Monitor of Web Image Monitor Als de instellingen van de printer en het printerstuurprogramma niet overeenkomen kunnen de afdrukresultaten tegenvallen Hardwarehandleiding Papier en andere media gt Papier plaatsen gt Papier plaatsen in de handinvoer gt Enveloppen plaatsen Wanneer u op enveloppen afdrukt dient u ze te plaatsen zoals ze uit de verpakking komen met de flappen open of dicht Voordat u de enveloppen plaatst dient u ervoor te zorgen dat ze zo plat mogelijk zijn Hardwarehandleiding Bijlage gt Sp
281. u Start klikt u op Alle programma s gt S mart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series gt Status Smart Organizing Monitor for 3400 Series Opmerking Ineen Windows Vista omgeving selecteert u Als administrator uitvoeren om Smart Organizing Monitor op te starten Klik op IP adres en voer vervolgens het MAC adres van de printer in die op de testpagina werd afgedrukt bv 00 11 22 aa bb cc in het venster MAC adres In het venster IP adres voert u het IP adres in dat u wilt instellen voor de printer Klik tweemaal op OK en klik vervolgens op Afsl Het printerstuurprogramma installeren In het dialoogvenster Printer Drivers and Utilities klikt u op de naam van het printerstuurprogramma dat u wenst te installeren Nadat u de overeenkomst heeft gelezen klikt u op Ik ga akkoord met de overeenkomst en daarna op Volgende gt Selecteer het vinkvakje Zoek naar netwerkprinters en klik vervolgens op Volgende gt Wanneer de lijst van gevonden printers verschijnt klikt u op deze printer en klikt u vervolgens op Volgende gt Indien nodig kliktu tweemaal op de weer te geven printer configureert u de instellingen en vervolgens klikt u op Doorgaan Als er een bericht verschijnt met de melding dat de installatie met succes voltooid is klik dan op Voltooien Opmerking Indien de instelling van het IP adres of het zoeken naar printers mislukt controleer dan of de printer aangesl
282. uale ha l obiettivo di fornire agli amministratori ulteriori informazioni sulle funzioni di sicurezza della stampante Leggere sia questo manuale che la Guida software Il manuale e il suo contenuto sono rivolti all utilizzo esclusivo degli amministratori Password Quando si accede alla stampante viene richiesto di inserire la password o il codice di accesso Si consiglia di cambiare immediatamente la password o il codice di accesso predefinito per evitare qualsiasi fuga di informazioni e utilizzo non autorizzato da parte di terzi Sar necessario inserire la password o il codice di accesso per effettuare le seguenti operazioni O Modifica delle impostazioni della stampante configurate attraverso il Web Image Monitor O Modifica delle impostazioni della stampante configurate dall amministratore attraverso lo Smart Organizing Monitor Per utilizzare la password o il codice di accesso predefinito lasciare vuoto il campo della password quando si utilizza Web Image Monitor Quando si utilizza lo Smart Organizing Monitor inserire Admin come codice di accesso Per modificare la password del Web Image Monitor e dello Smart Organizing Monitor bisogna accedere come Amministratore e quindi configurare le impostazioni necessarie E Riferimento Per ulteriori informazioni sull impostazione della password vedere la Guida del Web Image Monitor o dello Smart Organizing Monitor Copyright 2009 Printed in China ENGD ENGS
283. un p riph rique afin de respecter les limites d mission Utilisateurs aux Etats Unis ATTENTION Il est n cessaire d utiliser des c bles et des connecteurs correctement blind s et mis la terre pour les connexions un ordinateur h te et ou un p riph rique afin de respecter les limites d mission FCC Tous les utilisateurs A Un noyau de ferrite pour le cable d interface Ethernet est fourni avec cet appareil Faites une boucle avec le cable a environ 5 cm 2 inch O de l extr mit du cable la plus proche de l appareil Fixez le noyau de ferrite B Connectez le c ble Ethernet au port Ethernet qui se trouve l arri re de l imprimante Connectez l extr mit du c ble avec le noyau de ferrite l imprimante C Connectez l autre extr mit du c ble au r seau l aide d un hub par exemple Manuel du mat riel Papier et autres supports gt Recommandations papier gt Chargement du papier Lorsque vous avez charg du papier dans un magasin d alimentation papier d finissez toujours le type et le format du papier pour le magasin l aide de Smart Organizing Monitor ou Web Image Monitor Si les param tres de l imprimante et du pilote d impression ne concordent pas les r sultats d impression ne seront peut tre pas ceux escompt s Manuel du mat riel Papier et autres supports gt Chargement du papier gt Chargement du papier dans le Bypass gt Chargement des enveloppes Pour l impre
284. ung zur Installation und f hren Sie die in der Anleitung beschriebenen Einstellungen aus Zur Verwendung dieses Druckers sind die folgenden vier Schritte notwendig 1 Ausdrucken einer Tests eite 2 Installieren von Smart Organizing Monitor falls notwendig 3 Festlegen der IP Adresse des Druckers falls notwendig 4 Installieren des Druckertreibers Hinweis Falls der Drucker seine IP Adresse automatisch von einem DHCP Server bezieht brauchen Sie 2 Installieren von Smart Organizing Monitor und 3 Festlegen der IP Adresse des Druckers nicht auszuf hren Ausdrucken einer Testseite Den Drucker mit einem Ethernet Kabel an den Computer anschlie en O 22 Schalten Sie den Netzschalter des Druckers ein wahrend Sie die Taste J ob Reset dr cken und halten Sie die Taste gedr ckt bis die Warnung Anzeige anf ngt zu blinken Der Druckvorgang startet ungef hr 30 Sekunden nachdem die Warnung Anzeige angefangen hat zu blinken berpr fen Sie die IP Adresse des Druckers anhand der ausgedruckten Testseite Referenz Sie k nnen die von einem DHCP Server erhaltene IP Adresse auch mit dem Web Image Monitor ndern Verwenden Sie die auf der Testseite ausgedruckte IP Adresse um auf den Web Image Monitor zuzugreifen N here Einzelheiten zum Web Image Monitor finden Sie in der Software Anleitung Installieren von Smart Organizing Monitor Beenden Sie alle derzeit ausgef hrten Programme Legen Sie
285. ur printer e Check the label on the left side of your printer for the voltage rating BXG002 Using Manuals Be sure to read this section before any other part of this manual e This manual uses procedures based on Windows XP as an example unless otherwise specified Procedures and screens might vary depending on the operating system you are using Installing Manuals on Your Computer The manuals for this printer are provided as HIML and or PDF documents on the included CD ROM The format of the manuals will vary depending on the country where the printer was bought Use the following procedure to install the manuals from the CD ROM iitimportant O System requirements for viewing the HTML manual e 800 x 600 pixel display resolution or greater O Applications for viewing the HTML manual e Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 01 Service Pack 2 or higher e HTML manuals can also be viewed on a Macintosh O Applications for viewing the PDF manuals e Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader O Install the HTML manual along with Smart Organizing Monitor When a printer error occurs Smart Organizing Monitor may make reference to the HTML manual to notify the user of the procedure to resolve the problem O Quit all applications currently running P Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive If you are using a computer running a Macintosh operating system open Manuals htm from the CD ROM root directory 13 Select a language
286. uring the installation Before reconfiguring the settings print a test page to obtain the printer s IP address and then configure the necessary settings Reconfigure the printer s IP address For details about reconfiguring the printer s IP address see p 10 Specifying the printer s IP address Reconfigure the port settings On the Start menu open the Printers and Faxes window Click the icon of this printer On the File menu click Properties The printer properties dialog box appears Click the Ports tab and then click Add Port Click Standard TCP IP Port and then click New Port The Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard appears Click Next gt Enter the printer s IP address that is printed on the test page and then click Next gt If a screen prompting you to specify Device Type appears select the model of your printer and then click Next gt Click Finish Installing the Printer Driver in a Network Environment Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver Elmportant O Before installing the PostScript 3 printer driver print the test page to obtain the printer s IP address For details see p 8 Printing a test page O To install this printer driver you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission Log on as an Administrators group member 1 Quit all applications currently running BI Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive
287. used as the default settings for all applications P Reference For details about settings see the printer driver Help 27 28 Setting Up the Printer Driver Making the printer default settings Printing Preferences Elmportant O You cannot change the printer default settings for each user Settings made in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users O On the Start menu click Printers and Faxes The Printers and Faxes window appears 2 Click the icon of the printer you want to use E On the File menu click Printing Preferences The Printing Preferences dialog box appears 4 Make the necessary settings and then click OK 9 Note O Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications P Reference For details about settings see the printer driver Help Making printer settings from an application You can make printer settings for a specific application To make printer settings for a specific application open the Printing Preferences dialog box from that application The following explains how to make settings for the WordPad application provided with Windows XP O On the File menu click Print The Print dialog box appears 2 Select the printer you want to use in the Select Printer list and then click Preferences 3 Make the necessary settings and then click OK to start printing 9 Note O The procedure to open the Printing Pre
288. ve Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 10 of 32 Softwarevejledning Overvagning og konfiguration af printeren gt Sadan anvender man Web Image Monitor gt Konfiguration af netverksindstillinger gt Konfiguration af netverksprogramindstillinger Angiv ikke b de 49999 og 53550 som Portnr under Indstillinger af netverksudskrivning Softwarevejledning Overv gning og konfiguration af printeren gt S dan anvender man Web Image Monitor gt Konfiguration af netverksindstillinger gt Konfiguration af DNS indstillingerne Der kan angives et tal mellem 1 til 999 for DNS timeout sekunder Softwarevejledning Overv gning og konfiguration af printeren gt Brug af Smart Organizing Monitor gt Visning af printerstatus Nar du udskriver via en USB forbindelse opdateres printeroplysningerne i Smart Organizing Monitor muligvis ikke korrekt Softwarevejledning Den korrekte syntaks for Ipr kommandoen er som f lger Installation af printeren og ekstraudstyret gt Installation af printeren gt Udpakning Lyninstallationsvejledning 2 Udpakning Specielle handlinger under Windows gt c gt lpr S printerens IP adresse P printernavn o 1 sti filnavn Udskrivning af filer direkte fra Windows gt c gt lpr S printerens vzertsnavn P printernavn o 1 sti filnavn Udskrivningskommandoer gt Ipr Softwarevejledning Den korrekte syntaks for ftp
289. ves print quality 7 Slide the print cartridge in horizontally When the cartridge can go no fur ther raise it slightly and push it fully in Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place BXG060 g Carefully push up the front cover until it closes Be careful not to trap your fingers BXG061 Wait while the toner loads To avoid malfunction do not turn off the power while the Ready indicator on the control panel is blinking 62 Replacing the Print Cartridge O Put the protective sheet you removed in step Ej on the old print cartridge Then put the old print cartridge into the bag and then put it into the box BSP117S 9 Note O Make sure to cover the old print cartridge with the protective cover for recycling and environmental purposes O Comply with the print cartridge Recycling Program whereby used print Ga cartridges are collected for processing For details ask your sales or service representative 63 64 Replacing Consumables STE 6 Cleaning the Printer Cautions to Take When Cleaning Ax WARNING Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual This machine contains a laser beam gener ator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye damage A CAUTION The inside of this printer becomes very hot Do not touch parts labelled A indicating a hot surface Be sure to disconnect the
290. w The data is too large or com plex to print Especially when performing printing on Legal size paper under certain print quality setting print data be comes large and the job may be canceled If using the PCL 6 printer driv er set Resolution in Print Quali ty to 600 x 600 dpi If using the PostScript 3 printer driver set Print Quality in Printer Features to 600 x 600 dpi Transfer Roller has reached to replacing period The transfer roller is no longer usable and must be replaced Contact your sales or service representative Tray Not Detected The selected paper source tray is not set or is not set properly Check the indicated tray Tray 1 or Tray 2 The indicated paper input tray is not installed correctly or not installed Install the indicated paper in put tray correctly Tray Not Detected or No Pa per The indicated paper source tray is not set properly or no paper loaded Check the indicated tray Tray 1 or Tray 2 The indicated paper input tray is not installed cor rectly or not installed The indicated tray is out of paper e Install the indicated paper input tray correctly e Load paper into the indicat ed paper tray Error amp Status Messages on Smart Organizing Monitor Message Explanation Recommended Action Unit Not Detected The print cartridge is not set Set the print cartridge correctly Open the indi
291. wa hosta drukarki P nazwa drukarki o I Sciezka nazwa pliku Podr cznik oprogramowania Szczeg lne operacje w systemie Windows gt Drukowanie plik w bezpo rednio z systemu Windows gt Polecenia drukowania gt ftp Poprawna sk adnia dla polecenia Ipr jest nast puj ca ftp gt put Sciezkalnazwa pliku opcja ftp gt mput cie ka nazwa pliku sciezka nazwa pliku Podrecznik oprogramowania Szczeg lne operacje w systemie Windows gt Drukowanie plik w bezposrednio z systemu Windows gt Polecenia drukowania gt ftp Temat User i Password dla nadawanych danych przez ftp sa ustalone dla polecenia sysadm Aby przes a dane przez ftp wpisz polecenie sysadm B d Poprawnie Podr cznik sprz tu Instalacja drukarki i opcji gt Instalacja drukarki gt Rozpakowanie Podr cznik szybkiej instalacji 2 Rozpakowanie 5 Zdejmij materia zabezpieczaj cy umieszczony wewn trz drukarki 5 Zdejmij materia zabezpieczaj cy umieszczony wewn trz drukarki u OTT BxGOIE Nastepujace opisy nie dotycza tego urzadzenia Temat Btad Podrecznik sprzetu Podtaczanie drukarki gt Potaczenie sieciowe ditwazne Nalezy korzysta z ekranowanego kabla Ethernet Nieekranowane kable tworza elektromagnetyczne zakt cenia kt re mogtyby spowodowa nieprawid owe dzia anie urz dzenia Podr cznik sprz tu Papier i pozosta e materia y gt Zalecenia
292. x you can check the status of monitored printers The printer status is displayed using graphics and comments 9 Note O If Smart Organizing Monitor is monitoring multiple printers the Printer Driver Selection dialog box appears Select the printer driver used by the target printer and then click OK To check the status of a network printer click Search Network Printer Displaying the Printer Information Smart Organizing Monitor features three tabs Status Job Log and User Tools On these tabs you can view information about a monitored printer such as its configuration details and current status Displaying the printer status When you click the Status tab the printer name and tree appear Click an item in the tree to display information relating to it Print Cartridge Displays the remaining amount of each toner The following are used to indicate the remaining amount Level 1 to 5 Almost Empty and Empty A graphic also indicates each toner s status lt Input Tray You can check the following information about the input trays e Input Tray Displays the installed input trays e Status Displays the input tray status using a graphic e Paper Size Displays the size of the paper loaded into each input tray e Paper Type Displays the type of the paper loaded into each input tray Maintenance Displays the consumable names and status The graphics also indicate the consumables status Usin
293. x negara cm B CnpaBke Apa Bepa npuHrepa 30 Design Size A5 Paper Size B5 Save Date 2009 11 16 10 29 00 Print M0128681 doc Page 31 of 32 o Notas para os usu rios Estas notas fornecem informa es adicionais de opera o sobre o uso do produto e errata para a descri o nos manuais T pico Corre o Guia de Hardware Conectar a Impressora gt Conex o de Rede Guia de Instala o de Conex o de Rede 1 Imprimir uma P gina de Teste Software para O seguinte procedimento necess rio ap s a Etapa 1 no Guia de Hardware e antes da Etapa I no Guia de Instala o de Software para Conex o de Rede Depois desse procedimento avance para a etapa seguinte em cada manual Usu rios na Uni o Europ ia NcuiDaDO Deve se usar cabos devidamente revestidos e aterrados para conex o ao host e ou perif ricos para cumprir os limites de emiss es Usu rios nos Estados Unidos da Am rica cuIDADO Deve se usar cabos devidamente revestidos e aterrados para conex o ao host e ou perif ricos para cumprir os limites de emiss es da FCC Todos os usu rios A fomecido com este equipamento um n cleo de ferrite para o cabo de interface Ethernet Fa a um loop no cabo a cerca de 5 cm 2 polegadas da extremidade do lado do equipamento Conecte o n cleo de ferrite B Conecte o cabo Ethernet porta Ethernet localizada na parte traseira da impressora Conecte
294. xposing paper to direct sunlight e Store on a flat surface Keep paper in the package in which the paper came 33 Paper and Other Media Types of Paper and Other Media This section provides information about the types of paper supported by this printer and cautions for use Setting the paper type Use the printer driver or Smart Organizing Monitor to specify the paper type you want to use Printer driver On the printer driver screen click the Paper tab and then select a paper type under Paper Type lt Smart Organizing Monitor In the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box click the User Tools tab and then click the Printer Configuration button In the dialog box that appears click the Paper Input tab and then select the paper type from the Paper Type list for Tray 1 and or Tray 2 Types of paper Plain paper Item Description Paper thickness 65 to 99 g m 17 1 to 26 5 lb Supported paper tray Any input tray can be used Duplex supported size AA Legal 81 2 x 14 Letter 81 2 x 11 Thick paper Item Description Paper thickness 100 to 162 g m 26 6 to 43 0 Ib e Thick Paper 1 100 to 130 g m 26 6 to 34 6 lb e Thick Paper 2 131 to 162 g m 34 7 to 43 0 lb Supported paper tray e Thick Paper 1 Any input tray can be used however tray 2 only supports thick paper weighing 100 to 105 g m 26 6 to 28 0 Ib e Thick P
295. ying the printer status and the supply information e Printing a list of the printer configurations e Specifying the printer s IP address e Making the settings for paper loaded into each input tray e Making the input tray settings e Changing the factory set default settings e Making the system access code and language settings e Making the network protocol settings e Making the printer settings P Reference The Smart Organizing Monitor functions you can use under Windows oper ating systems are also available under Mac OS For details see p 89 Using Smart Organizing Monitor Installing Smart Organizing Monitor iitimportant O To install Smart Organizing Monitor log on as an Administrators group member Smart Organizing Monitor is automatically installed with the PCL 6 printer driver when installing it or by clicking Smart Organizing Monitor in the Printer Drivers and Utilities dialog box which appears when inserting the CD ROM provided with this printer 57 58 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer Displaying the Smart Organizing Monitor Dialog Box Methods of displaying the Smart Organizing Monitor dialog box differ depending on how it was installed lt If you installed Smart Organizing Monitor by clicking Smart Organizing Monitor in the Printer Drivers and Utilities dialog box On the Start menu point to Programs or All Programs and then point to Smart Organizing Monitor for SP 340
296. yst mu Windows gt P m tisk soubor p mo ze syst mu Windows gt P kazy pro tisk gt ftp Spr vn syntaxe pro p kaz ftp je n sleduj c ftp gt put cesta n zev souboru volba ftp gt mput cesta n zev souboru cesta n zev souboru Softwarov p ru ka Speci ln kony v syst mu Windows gt P m tisk soubor p mo ze syst mu Windows gt P kazy pro tisk gt ftp User a Password pro p enos dat pomoc ftp jsou nastaveny na sysadm Pro p enos dat pomoc ftp zadejte sysadm T ma Chyba Oprava Hardwarov p ru ka Instalace tisk rny a dopl k gt tisk rny gt Vybalen Instalace Rychl pr vodce instalac 2 Vybalen 5 Odstra te ochrann materi l 5 Odstra ite p ipevn n uvnit tisk rny ochrann materi l p ipevn n uvnit tisk rny BxGoNA N sleduj c popisy se nedaj pou t pro toto za zen T ma Chyba Hardwar oya p ru ka ds PE duiezita Pripojen tiskarny gt Zapojen do sit PouZivejte stin ny kabel Ethernet Nestin n kabely mohou zp sobit elektromagnetick ru en kter m e byt p inou poruch Hardwarov p ru ka Pap r a dal m dia gt Doporu en pro pr ci s pap rem gt Druhy pap ru a jin ch m di gt Typy pap ru Hardwarov p ru ka Pap r a dal m dia gt Vkl d n pap ru gt Vkl d n pap ru do b

4 - Ricoh

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents